JP7319121B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

A gaming machine that suggests an effective period during which the detection of a player's motion is effective, executes a promotion effect that prompts the player to move, and executes a specific effect when the player's motion is detected within the valid period. known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-212858 A

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 starts the promotion effect of the first mode suggesting the valid period,
After finishing the mode of promoting performance, the second mode of promoting performance suggesting the validity period is started. However, detection of the player's action is invalid during the period in which the promotion effect of the first mode is being executed. Therefore, there is no meaning in performing the action during the period in which the promotion effect of the first mode is being executed, and the interest associated with the promotion effect is insufficient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest associated with promotion effects.

(A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of types of detection means capable of detecting player actions;
promotion effect execution means capable of suggesting an effective period in which the detection of the player's motion is effective and executing a promotion effect to prompt the player to perform the motion;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the action of the player is detected within the valid period;
The promotion effect execution means is
a first pattern of executing a promoting effect suggesting a first valid period and ending the promoting effect suggesting the first valid period executed when the action of the player is not detected within the first valid period; ,
Execution of promotion effect suggesting the first valid period, execution of effect suggesting the second valid period when the action of the player is not detected within the first valid period, and execution of the effect suggesting the second valid period within the second valid period. and a second pattern that ends the effect suggesting the second valid period executed when the player's action is not detected, and
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the promotion effect of the second pattern is executed than when the promotion effect of the first pattern is executed,
As the promotion effect suggesting the second effective period in the second pattern, a promotion effect different from the promotion effect suggesting the first effective period in the second pattern can be executed,
The promotion effect in the first pattern suggesting the first effective period and the promotion effect suggesting the first effective period in the second pattern can be executed in the same mode ,
further comprising promotion effect determination means for determining in which of a plurality of patterns including the first pattern and the second pattern the promotion effect can be executed,
When the promotion effect determining means determines that the promotion effect of the first pattern can be executed and when it is determined that the promotion effect of the second pattern can be executed, the first It is possible to execute a specific effect in the same manner when a player's action is detected within the valid period.
It is characterized by
(1) A gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player). etc.), detection means capable of detecting the actions of the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a stick controller 31A capable of detecting the tilting operation of the player, and a push button 31B capable of detecting the pressing operation of the player. , etc.), a promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that prompts the player to move while suggesting an effective period in which detection of the player's motion is valid (for example, the effect control CPU 120, It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that displays a valid period bar display that informs the operation valid period during which detection of the player's operation is valid, and an operation prompt display that prompts the player to operate, etc.), and within the valid period A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when a player's action is detected (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect when a player's operation is detected within the operation valid period and the promotion effect executing means starts an effect suggesting a first effective period, and executes the effect when the player's action is not detected within the first effective period. A promotion effect of the first pattern to end (for example, displaying a valid period bar indicating the valid period of the first operation, and displaying the valid period bar when the player's operation is not detected within the valid period of the first operation) (e.g., it is possible to execute an operation prompting effect of "pressing x 1" to be erased), the effect suggesting the first valid period is started, and the player's action is not detected within the first valid period. A second pattern of promotion effect that starts the effect suggesting the second effective period at , and ends the effect when the player's action is not detected within the second effective period (for example, the first operation effective period is displayed, and when the player's operation is not detected within the first operation valid period, the valid period bar display is displayed to inform the second operation valid period, and within the second operation valid period It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect of "press x 2" that erases the valid period bar display when the player's operation is not detected, etc.), and the promotion effect of the first pattern can be executed. When the promotion effect of the second pattern is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the second pattern is executed (for example, the operation promotion effect of “press × 1” is executed The reliability of the big hit is higher when the "press x 2" operation prompting effect is executed than when the "press x 2" is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the player dares not perform any action even if the promotion effect is executed, thereby enhancing the amusement associated with the promotion effect.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific effect executing means is configured to detect the action of the player within the first effective period of the promotion effect of the first pattern and the second pattern of the promotion effect. A common specific effect can be executed when the player's action is detected within the first effective period of the promotion effect (for example, within the first operation effective period of the operation promotion effect of "press x 1" and when the player's operation is detected within the first operation effective period in the operation promotion effect of "press x 2", the cut-in effect of "golden background" is performed. executable, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the promotion performance is executed in the first effective period, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, and the interest associated with the promotion performance can be prevented. can increase

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the specific effect execution means detects the action of the player within the first effective period of the promotion effect of the second pattern, and A common specific effect can be executed when the action of the player is detected within the second valid period in the promotion effect of the second pattern (for example, the first When the player's operation is detected within the operation effective period and when the player's operation is detected within the second operation effective period in the operation promotion effect of "press x 2", the "gold background" is displayed. It may be possible to execute a cut-in effect, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the player who did not dare to perform the action even if the promotion performance was executed in the first effective period will have the opportunity to execute the specific performance again. It can enhance the interest that accompanies it.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the first valid period and the second valid period have different lengths (for example, the length of the second operation valid period is , shorter than the length of the first operation validity period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect from being slowed down during the second operation effective period.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, a plurality of types of the detection means (
For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, etc., as described above, and the promotion effect execution means is a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player during the valid period Suggest the type of (for example, as an operation prompt display,
display of a controller image simulating the stick controller 31A, or a button image simulating the push button 31B, etc.), detection means suggested in the first valid period, and detection means suggested in the second valid period. may be of the same type (for example, displaying a button image as an operation prompting display in the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period).

According to such a configuration, the opportunity to operate the same type of detection means will come again, so that the attention to the detection means can be increased.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, a plurality of types of the detection means (
For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, etc., as described above, and the promotion effect execution means is a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player during the valid period Suggest the type of (for example, as an operation prompt display,
display of a controller image simulating the stick controller 31A, or a button image simulating the push button 31B, etc.), detection means suggested in the first valid period, and detection means suggested in the second valid period. are of different kinds (e.g. the first
A button image may be displayed as an operation prompting display during the operation valid period, and a controller image may be displayed as an operation prompting display during the second operation valid period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add unexpectedness when the opportunity to perform the action comes again, and to increase the interest accompanying the promotion effect.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop design decision processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example regarding a ready-to-win pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding a setting suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing setting suggestion patterns and the like; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a setting example regarding an advance notice type determination table; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a step number pattern and the like; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an outer frame display pattern and the like; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution example of setting suggestion production|presentation using a ready-to-win pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation pattern of a chance up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation pattern determination ratio of a chance up production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect pattern of setting value suggestion effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect pattern determination ratio of a set value suggesting effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing executable periods of the chance-up effect and the setting value suggestion effect; It is a figure which shows the button production|presentation classification of the characteristic part 017AK. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the special production (character object operation|movement) of the characteristic part 017AK. 7A and 7B are a flowchart and the like showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing of the characteristic part 017AK; It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of the button production|presentation setting process of the characteristic part 017AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the button effect|presentation execution process of characteristic part 017AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of button production|presentation of the characteristic part 017AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of button production|presentation of the characteristic part 017AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of button production|presentation of the characteristic part 017AK. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of cut-in effect setting processing; It is a figure which shows the example of determination of cut-in production|presentation. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of an operation prompting effect setting process; It is a figure which shows the example etc. of determination of the operation promotion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of operation promotion production|presentation and cut-in production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing of operation promotion production|presentation and cut-in production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of operation promotion production|presentation and cut-in production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of operation promotion production|presentation and cut-in production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of an operation promotion effect and a cut-in effect according to Modification 1;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. first to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special symbols are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "
-” or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Lumines
cence), etc., and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game and the second special game,
Variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of types of decoration identification information different from special patterns is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game,
Decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended,
A display area may be provided for displaying active representations corresponding to the variable representations being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25 comprising a plurality of LEDs
A and a second reservation display 25B are provided, the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second reservation display 25B displays the number of LEDs lit, Display the number of second pending memories.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example,
An electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces is provided, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces approach the winning ball device 6A, A closed state in which game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as a second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3
is provided, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. )
A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if the normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern losing".
becomes. When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, such as "7") is selected as a fixed special symbol.
, The actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type, which will be described later. ) is stop-displayed, it is a "big win", and if a predetermined special pattern (small-win pattern, for example, "2") different from the big-win pattern is stop-displayed, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, the opening mode of the big prize opening (
The number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and the game state after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these.
As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning port (
high opening control, high base control) are also executed. The time saving state is a special pattern (especially the second special pattern)
This state is advantageous to the player because the efficiency of the variation of is improved.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is a low-probability base state,
The probability variable state is also called a high probability high base state, and the normal state is also called a low probability low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. note that,
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. or extinguishing, the action of the movable body 32, or a presentation using any presentation device including some or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed in line on predetermined effective lines in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
A decoration pattern constituting a chance eye is stopped and displayed on a predetermined pay line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition,
Various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
and so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101,
A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 and a CPU (Central
l Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input
t/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, the ROM 10
1 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation Control (drive) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the normal drawing reservation display 25C, etc.
and an output port for transmitting a signal to drive the solenoid.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12 . The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). ))
, game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the commands specifying the occurrence of errors, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in the RAM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute an effect based on a detection signal from B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected and appropriately indicates the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor),
CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video
o RAM), etc., and executes the production based on the production execution instruction from the production control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby displaying the effect image on the image display device 5.
to display. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . or lamp signal
are supplied to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 stores various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects.
Updatable numeric data indicating is counted. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3
). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
PU 103 executes RA to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 .
M clear processing is performed, and the initial value is set in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game.
In addition, the state of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. RAM1 with the backup flag off
02 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, the RAM 10
2 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
U103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. Production control CPU 12
0 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms).
3, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
3, first, by executing a predetermined switch process, detection signals from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 are detected through the switch circuit 110. Determination of presence/absence of reception (step S2
1). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22).
). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU1
03 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26
). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, C
PU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103
, first, a starting winning judgment process is executed (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103
Depending on the value of the special figure process flag provided in, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 is selected and executed. In addition, each processing of the special symbol process processing (step S110 ~
In S120), transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the special symbol normal process of step S110, the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value)
is executed when In this special symbol normal process, the first
A determination is made as to whether or not to start the special game or the second special game. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the display result is "big hit" or "small hit"
It includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for And the display result is "big hit"
If it is, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process flag is "8
". Also, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . And when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is "5"
On the other hand, when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When these settings are made, the value of the special process flag will be "
0", and the jackpot ending process is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. here,
When the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2
milliseconds) has passed. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read production control commands are performed. will be For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1
22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the RAM 12
2, the following steps S170-S1
77 processes are selected and executed.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. Image display device 5
If it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern in , the value of the production process flag is set to "
1”, and terminates the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 is driven, and the sound control board 13 is operated. By outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the speaker 8L, 8
During the variable display of decorative patterns, such as outputting voices and sound effects from R, and turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting commands (electrical decoration signals) to the lamp control board 14 Various production control is executed. After performing such production control,
For example, when an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decoration pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command specifying to stop display the fixed decoration pattern is received from the main board 11, A fixed decorative pattern as a display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3",
The effect processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. There is a "5"
, and the effect processing during the small hit is terminated.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end production process, the production control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state is set, and various performance controls are executed at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, effect control CPU120
sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and executes various effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol is displayed during variable display of special symbols (for example, a symbol indicating "-")
The variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).
.

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (“high”, “
Expressions such as "low", "different", etc.) may include that one is at a percentage of "0%". For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by the staff of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed in the board case together with the main board 11 . The lock switch and setting switch are designed so that they can be operated without opening the board case.
It is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back side of the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the main board 11
The front when visually recognizing is the front when visually recognizing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1 . In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display units of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display portions of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right hitting lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low probability high base state or a big hit game state as a time saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LE
D).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, 6 is the highest ball output rate, 6,
As the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the payout rate decreases. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the set value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. in this way,
The pachinko game machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the main board 1
1 side to the effect control board 12 side, it is notified by transmitting a setting value designation command.

8-1(A) and 8-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 102
0 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Up to "big hit"
, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 102
0 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "jackpot", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "
It is assigned to "Failure". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. is assigned to the "jackpot", 32767 to 33421
up to is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 102
0 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Up to "big hit"
, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 102
0 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Up to "big hit"
, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 102
0 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Up to "big hit"
, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 102
0 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Up to "big hit"
, 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losing". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state),
More determination values than when it is normal state or time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, and 1/1 when the set value is 3).
260, 1/240 when the set value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and a big hit game If the set value is 1, the probability of being determined increases (for example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, and the set value is 1/140 for a set value of 4, 1/120 for a set value of 5, and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (eg, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same value A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied.
The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is "
The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the case where the game state is normal state or time saving state, in the first special figure display result judgment table , the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238-1253 for the setting value 2, the range of 1238-1272 for the setting value 3, the range 1238-1292 for the setting value 4, and 12 for the setting value 5.
It is set in the range of 38 to 1317, and set in the range of 1238 to 1346 with the set value 6, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability is 1020
is the reference value (jackpot reference value) of the big hit determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range that is continuous with the common numerical value range increases and becomes higher.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this big hit determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, and 1 for the setting value 4.
Range of 347 to 1487, range of 1347 to 1556 at setting value 5, 134 at setting value 6
Each is set in the range of 7 to 1674. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range up to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. Jackpot judgment value range (
1020 to 1674) is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in a different numerical range. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range. When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 12
37 is assigned to "jackpot") On the other hand, in the case of setting value 2 to setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value It is set in the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. The non-common numerical range of this big hit determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3,
Setting value 4 is set in the range of 1238-1292, setting value 5 is set in the range of 1238-1317, and setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238-1346. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, 0 to
Among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range (
1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small hit for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set within the common numerical range of judgment values. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this big hit determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, and 1 for the setting value 4.
Range of 347 to 1487, range of 1347 to 1556 at setting value 5, 134 at setting value 6
Each is set in the range of 7 to 1674. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state,
As with the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, 1 of the hit judgment value regardless of the game state and setting value
With 020 as a reference, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the game state and the set value , a continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit judgment value of 32767 (
The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in the common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). A~
It is determined to be a jackpot C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of big wins, easier determination of specific types of big wins, etc.).
The mode is not limited, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. The setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 1 to
In the case of any one of 3, the game property is the same, but the probability of big wins and the probability of small wins are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3, and the prize balls obtainable during the big win game. A small number of settings (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided. A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characteristic portion regarding the set value will be described.
FIG. 8-2 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) register setting, RAM
102 may be executed after initial settings such as setting to enable access to 102 are performed.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). In addition, before the process of step S1A,
It is sufficient that a process of clearing a RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition is performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A, where the clear switch is OFF.
(step S1A; No), step S without executing the process of step S2A
Go to 3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (
step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the lock switch is ON and the game machine frame is opened, the pachinko game machine 1
is activated (step S4A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), pachinko game machine 1
Set value change processing (step S6A) for changing the set value set in is executed, and the processing proceeds to step S8A, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (step S5A; No), the pachinko game A set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether to clear the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RA
It is determined whether or not the M clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed (step S8A). R.
If the AM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. Processing (Step S9A)
is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S10A. Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 performs
For example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, it is determined whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by cold start or restored to the state before the power failure (started by hot start), and depending on each (step S10A), and the processing within the game control main processing is terminated.

In the RAM clearing process, by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored, the setting values and the RA
A process of clearing data other than the M clear flag is performed. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (addresses F000 to FXXX in the characteristic part related to the set values) It is also possible to clear only the game information stored in F003 and later).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. "E." in each of the divisions
may be displayed. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. Thereby, the production control board 1
On the side of 2, regardless of whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting value can be stored in a identifiable manner.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko machine 1, the recovery from a power failure during the change of the setting value, etc.
The security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it recognizable even in the management device of the game arcade.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 102 out of the hit determination values regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 8-1.
A range from 0 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be within the numerical value range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the random number MR1
is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the random value M
Whether the value of R1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the variable state It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the range. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure are different (the first
The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the special figure display result judgment table is 32
While there are 8 pieces, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is 655 pieces, which is about twice) On the other hand, the small hit judgment value The numerical range itself is set with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. A numerical range different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6 (32767 to
33094 or 32767 to 33421). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion related to the set value may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 66AK)
In the characteristic part 66AK, it is possible to execute a specific effect at a predetermined rate during execution of the variable display. The specific effect is a effect in which various notices and suggestions are made. The specific effect of the characteristic part 66AK includes, as executable effects, an advantage suggesting effect suggesting control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a setting suggesting effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1. there is

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 66AK. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step 66AKS011). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step 66AKS012). The advance notice effect determination processing makes it possible to decide the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggesting effect.

After the announcement effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step 66AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, a notice production control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various production executions. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. In addition, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the notice effect determination process of step 66AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the notice production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 66AKS014). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 66AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 66AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 66AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (the display part at the left end) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and another pending number "2" is displayed.
- Move (shift) the pending display in the display area corresponding to "8" one by one to the left.
As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 66AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 9-2 shows step 66AKS0 of the variable display start setting process as the stop pattern determination process.
11 is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in 11; In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed (step 66AKS021).
. Whether or not the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example.

If the reach effect of super reach is not executed (step 66AKS021; N
o) Determine the final stop symbol for non-reach and normal reach (step 66AKS0
22), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "losing". During normal reach, when the variable display result is "big hit" and when the variable display result is "
It includes cases where it becomes "losing". In the non-ready-to-win state in which the variable display mode of the decoration design does not become the ready-to-win mode, the fixed decoration design of the non-ready-to-win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop design. The final stop pattern at the time of non-reach is the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R
is determined to be a different (mismatched) decoration pattern. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and refers to a prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. , the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined from among the finalized decorative designs. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Of the symbols, the right finalized decoration symbol to be stop-displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "losing", the determined decorative pattern of the reach-losing combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of reach-losing. The final stop pattern at the time of reach loss is the same (matches) in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.
It is determined to be a decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data representing random numbers for determining left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124, etc., and refers to a prepared left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121. , "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 among the confirmed decoration patterns,
The decoration symbols having the same symbol number to be stopped and displayed together in 5R may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value (e.g. "1")
is added to or subtracted from the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern so that the fixed decorative pattern does not become a jackpot combination but a reach-losing combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decorative pattern, the difference between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern (
A pattern difference) may be determined, and a medium-determined decoration pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set.

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is "big hit", the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stop-displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the big win. The final stop pattern at the time of the big hit is "left"
, "center", and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined to have the same (matching) decoration design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit confirmed symbol updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like. Then, ROM12
1 by referring to the jackpot fixed pattern determination table prepared in advance,
"Left", "Center", and "Right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5 on the screen of the image display device 5
The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in C and 5R may be determined.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step 66AKS021; Yes
s), determine the final stop symbol at the time of super reach (step 66AKS023). During Super Reach, when the variable display result is "big hit" and when the variable display result is "losing"
If and when will be included. At super reach when the variable display result becomes "losing",
As the final stop pattern at the time of reach loss, the fixed decoration pattern of the reach loss combination is stop-displayed. When the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot,
The fixed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing", the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R is It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decoration patterns that constitute such a reach-losing combination or a big-hit combination are also called reach patterns. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-win patterns may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decoration pattern corresponding to the number may be only the effect image showing the number, or may be the effect image showing various characters in addition to the number.

The ready-to-win pattern is stored in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the ready-to-win pattern.
Any one of a plurality of decorative symbols may be determined by referring to a ready-to-win symbol determination table stored in advance and prepared in the . The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the ready-to-win pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . Following step 66AKS023, it is determined whether or not the determined ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS
024). At this time, if the decorative pattern corresponds to a number other than 7 (step 66AKS0
24; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated.

If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS024
;Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step 66AKS025). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by, for example, referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . As the presence/absence of the setting suggesting effect, one of "no effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is not executed, or "with effect" in which the setting suggesting effect is executed is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS025, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect (step 66AKS026). If it is determined to be "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect (step 66AKS026; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. If it is determined to be "with effect" (step 66AKS026;
Yes), specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 (step 66AKS0
27). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step 66AKS027, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS027, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step 66
AKS028), ending the stop symbol determination process. The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random values for determining the suggested setting pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 9-3 shows a setting example regarding the ready-to-win symbol determination table of the characteristic part 66AK.
In the characteristic part 66AK, the determination table 66 shown in FIG. 9-3 is used as the ready-to-win pattern determination table.
AKT01 is prepared in advance. In step 66AKS023 of the stop symbol determination process,
By referring to the determination table 66AKT01 or the like, the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is determined. In the determination table 66AKT01, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols serving as ready-to-win symbols differs depending on whether the variable display result is "loss" or "big win". For example, when the variable display result is "losing", 80 judgment values are assigned to the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1, 70 judgment values are assigned to the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 2, 60 judgment values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 3, 50 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 4, and 40 to the decoration design corresponding to the number 5.
30 determination values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 6, and 20 determination values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 7. When the variable display result is a "big hit", 20 determination values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1, 30 determination values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 2, and 3. 40 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number of , 50 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 4, and 60 judgment values are allocated to the decoration design corresponding to the number 5. 70 judgment values are assigned to the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 6, and 80 judgment values are assigned to the decoration design corresponding to the number 7.

According to the setting in the table 66AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display result is "loss", the decoration pattern determination ratio corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the number 2,
As the number 3, number 4, number 5, and number 6 are reached, the percentage of decoration design determination decreases, and the percentage determination of the decoration design corresponding to number 7 is the lowest. Variable display result is "big hit"
In the case of , the determination ratio of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3
As the number 1, number 4, number 5, and number 6 become higher, the determination rate of the decorative design increases, and the determination rate of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. Therefore, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern, the result of the variable display is "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the highest, the number 6 and the number 5. , the number four,
As the number 3 and the number 2 increase, the variable display result becomes "big win" when stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern, and the ratio of control to the big win game state decreases, and the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 1 is displayed. When stop-displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, the variable display result becomes "big win", and the ratio of control to the big win game state becomes the lowest.

FIG. 9-4 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 9-4 is prepared in advance as a setting suggestion effect determination table. At step 66AKS025 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT02. In the decision table 66AKT02, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is "losing" or "big win". For example, if the variable display result is "losing", 80 determination values are assigned to "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 20 determination values are assigned to "with effect" that the setting suggestion effect is executed. is assigned. When the variable display result is "big hit", 40 determination values are assigned to "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect is executed.
60 determination values are assigned to "with effect".

According to the settings in the table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variable display result is "loss", the determination ratio of "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect is changed to "with effect" that the setting suggestion effect is executed. higher than the determination ratio of When the variable display result is a ``jackpot'', the determination ratio of ``with performance'' to execute the setting suggestion performance is higher than the determination ratio of ``no performance'' to not perform the setting suggestion performance. Also, the setting suggesting effect is executed when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7. The percentage of the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 being stop-displayed as the ready-to-win pattern is low when the variable display result is "loss" and high when the variable display result is "big hit". As a result, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed.

FIG. 9-5(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.
These setting suggestion patterns have different suggested contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is to be changed, and the display color when it is to be changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win symbol, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper color, silver color, and gold color in addition to the normal display color red. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting confirmation of 6, which is the highest setting. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the pattern display color has changed and the pattern display color after the change.

FIG. 9-5B shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, the setting suggestion pattern determination table shown in FIG.
) is prepared in advance. At step 66AKS027 of the stop symbol determination process, a suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT03. In the determination table 66AKT03, there is a portion where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. For example, if the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern RE-2, and patterns RE-1 and RE-3 are assigned judgment values. No value assignment (0). When the set value is 2, 65 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-2. , pattern R
E-3 has no decision value assigned (0). If the set value is 3, the pattern RE-
0 is assigned 65 decision values, pattern RE-1 is assigned 30 decision values, pattern RE-2 is assigned 5 decision values, and pattern RE-3 is assigned no decision values. None (0). When the set value is 4, 40 judgment values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 3 judgment values are assigned to pattern RE-2.
0 decision values are assigned and pattern RE-3 has no decision values assigned (0). When the set value is 5, 40 determination values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 determination values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 30 determination values are assigned to pattern RE-2. pattern RE-3 has no decision value assigned (0 pieces). When the set value is 6, 35 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern RE-2. pattern RE
Five decision values are assigned to -3.

In the characteristic part 66AK, when the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the big win game state is high. When the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low, and when the setting suggesting effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Further, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the degree of expectation, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is high, and the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern RE-3.
is determined to be 6, which is the highest setting when running at . In this way, the ready-to-win symbols when the variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode include a symbol display mode for suggesting control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode for 7. A pattern display mode for suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 while suggesting the control of the jackpot game state such as the decoration pattern corresponding to the number is included.
When the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is displayed in the normal display color to suggest control of the jackpot game state, and then the pattern display color is changed. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state are continuously made, and suggestions regarding the set values are made.

In the characteristic portion 66AK, the setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, step 66AKS02 of the stop symbol determination process
At 8, the pattern RE-1 is not determined as the suggested setting pattern, so the pattern display color is not changed to copper. Thus, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1
Depending on whether the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, whether or not the pattern display color is changed to copper differs as a pattern display mode. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, step 66A of the stop symbol determination process
Since pattern RE-3 is not determined as the setting suggestion effect in KS028, the symbol display color is not changed to gold. Thus, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is changed to gold as the symbol display mode when the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. It depends on whether or not it is changed to

In the stop symbol determination process, when it is determined in step 66AKS024 that the ready-to-win symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to the number 7, step 66AKS027 specifies the set value, and then step 66AKS025 may be performed. Step 66AKS025
Then, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined not only by the variable display result but also by a different ratio according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . In this case, if the set value is advantageous for the player, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate. When the ready-to-win pattern is determined to be a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined that the variable display result is "big win" and the game is controlled to the big win game state. Even if the ready-to-win pattern is not a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the setting suggestion performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the ready-to-win symbol is a decoration symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate. In this way, when the aspect of variable display of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode, setting suggesting effects may be executed at different ratios according to a plurality of types of ready-to-win modes.

The setting suggesting effect is instead of changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decoration symbol stopped displayed as the ready-to-win symbol, or in addition to changing the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape and pattern of the decoration pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of a background image, an outer frame image, and other arbitrary effect images, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of the movable members for effects, and the like. It may be one that changes the rendering mode by any rendering device, such as a combination of some or all.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a pattern that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-
3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is "big hit", and may not be determined when the variable display result is "losing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 9-6 shows step 66AKS0 of the variable display start setting process as the advance notice effect determination process.
12 is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in 12; In the advance notice effect determination process, presence/absence of effect according to whether or not to execute the notice effect and the type of effect to be executed are determined (step 66AKS041). The presence or absence of the effect and the type of effect are determined by referring to a table for determining the type of effect for the effect previously stored in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the type of the effect for the effect. You should do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the type of announcement effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . Step 66AKS04
In 1, it is determined to be "no notice" in which the notice effect is not executed, or "step up", "character", or "title" in the case of executing the notice effect.

Among the notice effects that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1, for example, a step-up notice corresponding to the "step-up" effect type, a character notice corresponding to the "character" effect type, and a "title" effect type It is sufficient if the corresponding title notice is included. In the step-up notice, for example, the effect mode of the notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, is changed stepwise from one step to a plurality of steps. The effect mode to be changed in the step-up notice is not limited to the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, but the output of the sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the decorative LED, and the movement of the effect. It may include movement of members, or a combination of some or all of these. In the step-up notice, after the production in the first production mode is executed,
There may be a case where the process ends without changing the effect mode. In this example,
In the case of executing the step-up notice, during the execution of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the effect image showing the character is displayed in the display area of the effect image surrounded by the display frame that is the outer frame of the rectangular shape of the predetermined display color. The display content (display mode) of is switchably displayed according to a predetermined order, and the performance mode is changed to a plurality of stages to perform a step-up effect. The effect image displayed when the step-up notice is executed includes an outer-frame partial image showing the display frame and an inner-frame partial image used for switching display in step change. The in-frame partial image may be a still image that is still displayed at each stage of the step change, or may be a moving image that is displayed as an animation at each step of the step change.

In the character announcement, an effect image showing a predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5 . The character notice is controlled to a big win game state according to the type, size, color, pattern, action, dialogue of the character, or a combination of some or all of these (big win expectation). are performed differently. In the title notice, the image display device 5
, the title is displayed with a predetermined character image. The advance notice of the title is controlled to a jackpot game state according to the effect mode including the content, size, color, pattern, display timing, display period, display update speed of the title, or a combination of some or all of these. It is executed so that the ratio (jackpot expectation) is different.

Based on the determination result of step 66 AKS041, "no notice" for not executing the notice effect
(step 66AKS042). If it is determined to be "no notice" (step 66AKS042; Yes), the notice effect determination process is terminated. If it is not "no notice" (step 66AKS042; No), it is determined whether or not "step-up" corresponding to step-up notice is decided (step 66AKS043).
). If "character" or "title" other than "step up" is determined (step 66AKS043; No), an effect pattern corresponding to "character" or "title" is determined (step 66AKS044). The production patterns for character announcements and title announcements are stored in the ROM 1 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the announcement production patterns.
By referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in 21, one of a plurality of notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the effect type of the notice effect is determined to be "step up" (step 66 AKS
043; Yes), the step number pattern is determined (step 66AKS045). The step number pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice. The step number pattern is determined by referring to a step number pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the step number pattern. It should be determined by The numerical data indicating the random number for determining the step number pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In this embodiment, five patterns SU-1 to SU-5 are provided as a plurality of step number patterns, and the number of steps is one of 1 to 5 according to each pattern.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS045, it is determined whether pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046). When a step number pattern other than pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; No), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. If pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; Yes),
Specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 (step 66AKS047
). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a setting value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 . Accordingly, in step 66AKS047, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS047, after determining the outer frame display pattern (step 66
AKS048), ending the notice effect determination process. The outer frame display pattern corresponds to whether or not to change the display color of the outer frame partial image when the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice reaches 5, and to the outer frame display color if changed. This is a production pattern. The outer frame display pattern is stored in the ROM 1 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the outer frame display pattern.
One of a plurality of outer frame display patterns may be determined by referring to a prepared outer frame display pattern determination table stored in advance in 21 . The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the outer frame display pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 9-7 shows a setting example regarding the advance notice effect type determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, a decision table 66AKT04 shown in FIG. 9-7 is prepared in advance as the announcement effect type decision table. At step 66AKS041 of the notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the notice effect effect and the effect type are determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT04. In the determination table 66AKT04, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", "normal (losing)", "super (losing)", or "big hit", it is assigned to a production type or the like. The number of judgment values is different.

The variable display content can be specified based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 and the display result of the variable display indicated by the variable display result notification command. When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, resulting in the display result of the variable display. is "losing". When the variable display content is "normal (losing)", after the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is executed, and then the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the display result of the variable display becomes "loss". When the variable display content is "super (losing)", after the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the ready-to-win effect of super-reach is executed, and then the determined decorative pattern of the winning-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, the display result of the variable display becomes "loss". When the variable display content is "big hit", after the mode of variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the ready-to-win performance of normal reach or super reach is executed, and then the determined decoration pattern of the big win combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit".

In the determination table 66AKT04, for example, for the effect types of "character" and "title", no determination value is assigned (0
Individual). On the other hand, when the variable display content is "normal (loss)", 10 determination values are assigned to the "character" effect type, and the variable display content is "super (loss)".
, 50 determination values are assigned to both the "character" and "title" effect types, and if the variable display content is "jackpot", 70 to the "character" effect type.
100 determination values are assigned to each determination value and the effect type of "title", and there is allocation of determination values. In the notice type of "step up", the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)"
, 30 determination values are assigned, and 120 determination values are assigned when the variable display content is other than "non-reach (loss)". For the production type of "Title",
If the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", there is no judgment value assignment (0 pieces), and if the variable display content is "super (loss)", 50 Determination values are assigned, and 100 determination values are assigned when the variable display content is "big hit". As a result, depending on whether the performance type is "step-up" or "title", the degree of expectation for big wins corresponding to the ratio of control to the big win game state is different.
More specifically, even if the variable display content is other than "jackpot", the "step up" effect type is assigned a larger judgment value than the "title" effect type, so the variable display content is Even cases other than "jackpot" are likely to be determined at a relatively high rate. On the other hand, as for the effect type of "title", if the variable display contents are other than "jackpot", only 50 determination values are assigned in the case of "super (losing)", and "step Since a smaller determination value is assigned than the effect type of "up", when the variable display result is other than "big hit", it is determined at a relatively low rate. Therefore, when the title notice is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the step-up notice is executed. According to a similar comparison with respect to the presence or absence of the effect of the notice effect and the number of judgment values assigned to the effect type, when the title notice is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher than when the character notice is executed. . When the character announcement is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the step-up announcement is executed. When the step-up notice is executed, the degree of expectation for big win becomes higher than when the notice performance is not executed.

FIG. 9-8(A) shows a configuration example of a step number pattern. The plurality of step number patterns differ from each other in the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice. More specifically, the pattern SU-1 has 1 step, the pattern SU-2 has 2 steps, the pattern SU-3 has 3 steps, the pattern SU-4 has 4 steps, and the pattern SU-5 has five steps. In the step-up notice, the effect by the first effect mode is the effect of the 1st step, and each time the effect mode is changed thereafter, the number of steps increases by one step from the effect of the 2nd step to the effect of the 5th step. proceed.

FIG. 9-8B shows a setting example regarding the step number pattern determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic part 66AK, as a step number pattern determination table, FIG.
A determination table 66AKT05 shown in (B) is prepared in advance. At step 66AKS045 of the announcement effect determination process, by referring to the determination table 66AKT05,
A step number pattern is determined. In the determination table 66AKT05, the variable display content is "
Non-reach (losing)", "Normal (losing)", "Super (losing)", "Big Hit"
The number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the step number pattern differs depending on which one. By comparing the number of judgment values assigned to each step number pattern for each variable display content, in the step-up notice, as the step number increases from 1 to 3, the degree of expectation for a big win increases. Pattern SU-4 and pattern SU-5 are assigned no determination value (zero) when the variable display contents are other than "big win". Therefore, in the step-up notice, when the number of steps reaches 4 or 5, it is determined that the jackpot game state is controlled. In this way, in the step-up notice, as the number of steps in which the performance mode is changed in stages increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state increases.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the outer frame display pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns SC-0 to SC-3 are provided as a plurality of outer frame display patterns. These outer frame display patterns have different suggestive contents according to the outer frame display color when the number of steps in the step-up notice reaches 5, which is the fifth step. The outer frame display color is
This is the display color of the outer frame partial image displayed in the step-up notice, and can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color of white. Pattern SC-0 does not change the display color of the outer frame, suggesting that the player has a low expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Pattern SC-1 changes the outer frame display color to copper, suggesting that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern SC-2 changes the display color of the outer frame to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value that is advantageous to the player. Pattern SC-3 changes the outer frame display color to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest setting value, is established. In this way, in the fifth step in the step-up notice, it is possible to suggest the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 according to whether or not the outer frame display color has changed and the changed outer frame display color. .

FIG. 9-9(B) shows a setting example regarding the outer frame display pattern determination table of the characteristic portion 66AK. In the characteristic portion 66AK, FIG. 9-9 (B
) is prepared in advance. At step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, the outer frame display pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT06. In the determination table 66AKT06, there is a portion where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the outer frame display pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. For example, if the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-2, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-1 and pattern SC-3. No value assignment (0). When the set value is 2, 65 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 5 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. , pattern S
C-3 has no decision value assigned (0). If the setting value is 3, the pattern SC-
65 decision values are assigned to 0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2, and no decision value is assigned to pattern SC-3. None (0). When the setting value is 4, 40 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 3 judgment values are assigned to pattern SC-2.
0 decision values are assigned, and pattern SC-3 has no decision values assigned (0). When the set value is 5, 40 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. Pattern SC-3 has no decision value assigned (0 pieces). When the set value is 6, 35 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-0, 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-1, and 30 decision values are assigned to pattern SC-2. and pattern SC
Five decision values are assigned to -3.

In the characteristic part 66AK, when the display color of the outer frame partial image is changed in the step-up notice, the effect mode is changed up to the fifth step in which the number of steps in the step-up notice is 5, so that the jackpot game state is controlled. be confirmed. When the outer frame display color does not change according to the pattern SC-0, the set value is low, which is an advantageous set value for the player. is greater than or equal to 2. Further, when the outer frame display color is changed to silver by pattern SC-2, the degree of expectation is high, which is a set value advantageous to the player, and when the outer frame display color is changed to gold by pattern SC-3, It is determined that 6 is the highest setting. In this way, the plurality of stages in the case of changing the effect mode step by step in the step-up notice include a notification stage for notifying that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state such as the fourth step when the number of steps is four;
and a suggesting step of suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, such as the fifth step when the number of steps is five. After changing to the performance mode of the fourth step, the performance mode is changed to the fifth step, so that after changing the performance mode to the notification stage, the performance mode is changed to the suggesting stage.

In the characteristic portion 66AK, it is possible to perform the fifth step in the step-up notice differently depending on the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the pattern SC-1 is not determined as the outer frame display pattern in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, so the outer frame display color is copper. It never changes color. As described above, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1, it is determined whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to copper as the effect mode of the fifth step. different. If the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the outer frame display pattern is not determined to be the pattern SC-3 in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination processing, so the outer frame display color is gold. never changed. As described above, depending on whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6 or not, whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to gold differs as the effect mode of the fifth step.

In the notice effect determination process, when step 66AKS043 determines "step-up notice", step 66AKS047 specifies the setting value, and then step 66A.
It may proceed to KS045. In step 66AKS045, the step number pattern may be determined not only by the variable display content but also by a different ratio according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In this case, if the set value is advantageous for the player, the step number pattern may be determined so that the number of steps increases at a high rate.
Even when pattern SU-4 or pattern SU-5 is determined, the variable display result may be "losing" at a predetermined rate, and the jackpot game state may not be controlled. Pattern SU-5
Even when a step number pattern other than the step number pattern is determined, the outer frame display pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the step number pattern is pattern SU-5, the outer frame display pattern other than pattern SC-0 may be determined at a high rate. In this way, when the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice is executed, even if the effect mode can be changed to suggest the set value by a different ratio according to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode. good.

The effect mode suggesting the set value in the fifth step of the step-up notice is to change the outer frame display color, which is the display color of the outer frame partial image, instead of changing the outer frame display color. In addition, the shape and pattern of the outer frame partial image, the shape, pattern and color of the inner frame partial image, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the production Any effect mode in the step-up notice may be changed, such as the operation of the movable member, or a combination of some or all of them.

The plurality of outer frame display patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when controlled to the big win game state and a pattern that can be determined even when not controlled to the big win game state. For example, pattern SC-0 and pattern SC-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "loss", whereas pattern SC-2 and pattern SC-
3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is "big hit", and may not be determined when the variable display result is "losing". In this case, the pattern SC-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern SC-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the current setting.

FIG. 9-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 66AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 66AKS061). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be judged that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 66AKS061; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 is
Various commands are created based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is sent to the display control unit 123
, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating the movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 9-10, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step 66AKS062). The notice effect period is set, for example, in step 6 of the variable display start setting process.
In the effect control pattern (announcement effect control pattern, etc.) determined in 6AKS013, it may be determined in advance. If it is determined that it is the advance notice performance period (step 66
AKS062; Yes), control to execute the notice effect is performed (step 66AKS06
3). When the step-up notice is executed by the control of step 66AKS063, the notice effect of changing the effect mode step by step can be executed as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Also, if the number of steps in the step-up notice is 5,
By changing the outer frame display color to a changeable fifth step effect mode, the pachinko game machine 1
Suggestions can be made as to the setting of

If it is not the notice performance period (step 66AKS062; No), step 66AK
After performing the control of S063, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 66
AKS064). The reach effect period is, for example, step 66AKS of the variable display start setting process.
013 determined in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.),
It is sufficient if it is determined in advance. If it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 66
AKS064; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 66AKS0
65). The control of step 66AKS065 makes it possible to suggest the control of the jackpot game state by executing, for example, normal reach or super reach effects. In addition, when the decoration pattern to be the ready-to-win pattern is stopped and displayed, the ratio of control to the big-win game state can be varied according to the ready-to-win game state as a suggestion for the control of the big win game state. At this time, when the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win performance after the change of the pattern display color is executed to continuously suggest the control of the jackpot game state and pachinko. New suggestions regarding the setting values of the gaming machine 1 can be made.

If it is not the reach effect period (step 66AKS064; No), step 66A
After controlling KS065, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step 66
AKS066). The change effect period may be determined in advance as an effect execution period for changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When it is determined that it is the change effect period (step 66AKS066; Yes), control is performed to execute the change effect (step 66AKS067).

If it is not the change effect period (step 66AKS066; No), step 66AK
After performing the control of S067, for example, based on the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc., for executing the production during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern After performing control (step 66AKS068), the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

When it is determined at step 66AKS061 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 66AKS061; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 66AKS069). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 66AKS069; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the pattern confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the pattern confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 66AKS069; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which results in a variable display of the decorative pattern. Perform control for deriving and displaying the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) (step 66AKS07
0). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 66AKS071). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 66AKS072), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIGS. 9-11 relate to the characterizing part 66AK and show execution periods and execution timings of various effects during the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols. Among them, FIG. 9-11(A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 9-11 (B1) shows the symbol display colors when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win symbols is not executed. FIG. 9-11 (B2) shows the symbol display colors when the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win symbols is executed. FIG. 9-11(C) shows the execution period and execution timing of the advance notice effect that is the step-up advance notice. FIG. 9-11(D) shows the execution period, the performance time, and the content of the performance corresponding to the execution step for the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice.

When the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is not executed, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started at the timing T0, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established at the timing T1. The pattern display color is maintained in the normal display color until the variable display of the decoration pattern is completed at timing T3 through the development of the ready-to-win performance that shifts from the ready-to-win performance of the normal reach to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win at T2. In this case, when the ready-to-win is established at the timing T1, the decoration symbols stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbols are 1 to 7.
The ratio of control to the jackpot game state differs depending on which of the numbers of . In this way, by setting the decoration symbols stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win symbols to the decoration symbols corresponding to any of the numbers 1 to 7, it is possible to suggest the control of the big win game state.

When the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, for example, after the ready-to-win effect develops from the normal ready-to-win effect to the super ready-to-win effect at timing T2,
A change effect is executed, and the symbol display color can be changed from the normal display color to the suggestive display color. However, in the case of the setting suggesting pattern RE-0, the symbol display color does not change even when the change effect is executed. When the change performance is executed and the pattern display color can be changed, the decoration pattern stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern is the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of control to the jackpot game state. suggests that the In addition, setting values advantageous to the player are set according to whether or not the pattern display color of the ready-to-win pattern is changed when the change effect is executed, and the suggestive display color when changed. Different percentages. In this way, when the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern, the effect that can be executed in a period after a specific timing, such as the period after the timing T2 in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win can be executed, By making it possible to change the symbol display color of the ready-to-win symbol by the change performance, it is possible to continuously suggest the control of the jackpot game state and to suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Since the ready-to-win pattern is stop-displayed when the ready-to-win is established at the timing T1, in a specific period after the timing T1, the decoration pattern stopped and displayed as the ready-to-win pattern can suggest the control of the jackpot game state. . Then, when the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state until timing T2 in the specific period. It suggests that it is controlled to a big hit game state at a higher rate than. After that, after the timing T2 in the specific period, when the change effect is executed, the pachinko game machine 1 determines whether or not the symbol display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed, and according to the suggestive display color when it is changed. Suggestions are made as to the setting value of . Further, even when the change performance is executed, the decoration pattern corresponding to the number 7 as the ready-to-win pattern is continuously stopped and displayed, so that the suggestion regarding the control of the big winning game state can be continuously performed. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of normal reach or super reach is executed, the ready-to-win effect of normal reach can be executed in a specific period from timing T1 when ready-to-win is established to timing T2 to develop ready-to-win. Suggestions to be controlled to the big win game state can be made at different ratios according to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. After that, until the timing T3 when the variable display ends after the timing T2, if the ready-to-win pattern is a decoration pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion to be controlled to the big win game state is continued at a rate corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern. If the ready-to-win pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the suggestion to be controlled to the big win game state is continuously performed at a rate corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern, and pachinko is performed according to the pattern display color of the ready-to-win pattern. Suggestions regarding the setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. In addition, the timing T3 when the variable display ends from the timing T1 when the reach is established
is defined as a specific period in which the ready-to-win performance can be executed, and in this specific period, from timing T1 to timing T2, a suggestion to be controlled to a big win game state is made at a rate corresponding to the ready-to-win pattern, and after timing T2, timing T3. Until then, the case where the suggestion to be controlled to the big hit game state at a rate corresponding to the reach pattern is continued, and the suggestion to be controlled to the big win game state at a rate according to the reach pattern is continued and the reach pattern A setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested according to the symbol display color.

When the advance notice performance as the step-up notice is executed, after the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at timing T0, the execution of the step-up notice is started and becomes the first step in the period D11, and in the period D12. It becomes the second step, the third step in the period D13, the fourth step in the period D14, and the fifth step in the period D15. In this case, as a step-up notice, the display of the frame-inside partial image changes stepwise from the first step to the fifth step. However, when the number of steps corresponding to the determination result of the step number pattern is reached, the execution of the step-up notice is terminated without changing to the effect mode of the next step.

The first step to the third step in the period D11 to D13 all have a performance time of 1 second, and are executed before the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state at the timing T1, and the jackpot is won. It becomes a big hit notice that suggests the control of the game state. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-1, the first step in the period D11 is started, and when the first step in the period D11 ends after the effect time of one second has elapsed, the step-up notice is executed. also ends. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-2, after the first step in the period D11 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-1, the display of the partial image inside the frame is changed, and the display is changed to the period D12. When the second step in period D12 ends after one second of the performance time has elapsed, execution of the step-up notice also ends. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-3, as in the case of the pattern SU-2, when the second step in the period D12 is completed, the display of the partial image inside the frame is changed, and the display of the framed partial image is changed to the period D13. The 3rd step is started, and after 1 second of the effect time has passed, the period D1
When the third step in 3 ends, the execution of the step-up notice also ends.

In the fourth step in the period D14, the production time is 5 seconds longer than 1 second, and the timing T
At 1, it is executed after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is established in the ready-to-win mode, and the big-win decision is made to definitely inform that the control to the big-win game state is performed. When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-4, after finishing up to the third step in the period D13 as in the case of the pattern SU-3, the reach is established at the timing T1, and then the frame partial image is displayed. The display or the like is changed to start the fourth step in the period D14, and when the fourth step in the period D14 ends after 5 seconds of presentation time has passed, the execution of the step-up notice is also finished.

The 5th step in the period D15 is executed after the ready-to-reach development in which the performance time becomes 10 seconds longer than 1 second or 5 seconds, and the ready-to-reach performance of the normal reach is shifted to the ready-to-reach performance of the super reach at the timing T2, It becomes a big win determination that definitely notifies that the control to the big win game state is performed, and additionally, it becomes a set value suggestion that makes a suggestion about the set value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the step number pattern is the pattern SU-5, after completing up to the fourth step in the period D14 as in the case of the pattern SU-4, reach development occurs at the timing T2, followed by the in-frame partial image. After changing the display and the like, the fifth step is started in period D15. At this time, depending on which of the patterns SC-0 to SC-3 the outer frame display pattern is, whether or not to change the outer frame display color as the display mode of the outer frame partial image, and when to change Suggestion of different display colors. After the fifth step in the period D15 is thus started, the performance time of 10 seconds has elapsed, and when the fifth step in the period D15 ends, the execution of the step-up notice also ends.

Since the step-up notice can change the presentation mode up to the third step before the reach is established at timing T1, in the specific period after timing T0 in which the step-up notice can be executed, up to timing T1 Depending on whether the execution of the step-up notice ends or continues to the next step, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 4 or more, in a period D14 included from the timing T1 to the timing T2 in the specific period, as a suggestion regarding the control of the big win game state, a fourth announcement of the big win determination is made. It is possible to change the performance mode of the step. Furthermore, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, in a period D15 included after the timing T2 in the specific period, as a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, an outer frame corresponding to the outer frame display pattern is displayed. It is possible to change to the presentation mode of the fifth step, which is the display color.

If the step number pattern corresponds to any of patterns SU-1 to SU-4 and the number of steps is less than 5, step up is performed before changing to the fifth step effect mode in period D15. Execution of the notice ends. Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed, until the timing T2 in the specific period corresponding to the number of steps less than 5,
A case is included in which the suggestion is terminated after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the step number pattern corresponds to the pattern SU-5 and the step number is 5, the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to the fifth step effect mode in the period D15.
Suggestions about the setting value of Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed,
Corresponding to the number of steps being 5, after performing the control regarding the control of the big winning game state until the timing T2 in the specific period, the suggestion regarding the control of the big winning game state is continued as an effect that can be executed after the timing T2. It includes a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested.

When the advance notice effect of the step-up notice is executed, the first step to the third step are performed during a specific period from the timing T0 at which the variable display is started to the timing T1 at which the ready-to-win state is established.
The performance mode can be changed up to the step, and the suggestion to be controlled to the big win game state can be performed at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the performance mode is changed. After that, timing T1
Until the timing T2 when the reach is developed after that, if it changes to the production mode of the 4th step,
It is possible to suggest that it is decided to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Further, after the timing T2 until the timing T3 when the variable display ends, if the effect mode is changed to the fifth step, it is suggested that the control to the jackpot game state is confirmed, and the outer frame of the outer frame partial image is suggested. A setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested according to the display color. The period from timing T0 at which the variable display starts to timing T3 at which the variable display ends is defined as a specific period during which the advance notice effect as the step-up notice can be executed. Suggestion to be controlled to the jackpot game state is performed at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the mode is changed, and until timing T3 after timing T2, the fifth step is performed.
When the suggestion ends without changing to the performance mode of the step, when the performance mode changes to the fifth step and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is continued and the pachinko game is played according to the performance mode of the fifth step. A case may be provided in which a suggestion regarding the setting value of the machine 1 is made.

In the step-up notice, each step from the first step to the third step has a performance time of 1 second, the fourth step has a performance time of 5 seconds, and the fifth step has a performance time of 10 seconds. In the step-up notice, the plurality of stages for changing the effect mode in stages include a notification stage for notifying that control is to be performed in a big win game state, as in the fourth step, and a fifth step.
Like the step, a suggesting step of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is included. Since the presentation time of the fifth step is set to be longer than the presentation time of the fourth step, the suggestion stage has a longer execution period than the notification stage. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) is executed, the player shoots an image or video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and sends it to SNS (Social Net
There is a tendency to post on membership registration websites such as working Service, Internet video supply sites, and the like. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, the effect (unfavorable effect) that is often performed even in a disadvantageous situation does not arouse the desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous effect is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, in the characteristic part 66AK, the execution period for advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the photographing time, and the execution period for disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that for advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. In the step-up notice of the characteristic portion 66AK, the first
The performance time of the 4th step for determining the big win is longer than the performance time from the step to the 3rd step. Further, the presentation time of the fifth step, in which the big win is determined and the set value is suggested, is longer than the presentation time of the fourth step. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the presentation mode of the fifth step of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, and to secure the photographing time. In addition, since the photographing time can be secured, the photographed images and moving images are made public by the players on the Internet, and public interest in the pachinko game machine 1 can be heightened. In addition, in many cases, since the pictures including which pachinko game machine 1 in which game hall were photographed are disclosed, from the game hall side, the game hall is advertised by the player. become. In this way, pachinko machine 1
By securing the shooting time when the set value of is suggested, synergistic effects are brought about not only for the player but also for the game arcade side.

The presentation time of the fifth step in the step-up notice may be varied according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. For example, pattern RE-0 has an effect time of 3 seconds, pattern RE-1 has an effect time of 7 seconds, pattern RE-2 has an effect time of 12 seconds, and pattern RE-3 has an effect time of 15 seconds. A rendering time corresponding to each pattern may be set so as to be seconds. In this manner, the execution period of the effect may be varied according to the effect mode when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested. The execution period may be longer in the case of a performance mode with a high degree of advantage for the player than in the case of a mode with a low degree of advantage for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking when the effect mode is changed to suggest that the setting value is advantageous, and to secure the shooting time.

In the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-win pattern, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the symbol display color, which is the display color of the ready-to-win pattern. In the fifth step of the step-up notice, setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the outer frame display color, which is the display color of the outer frame partial image. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach pattern and the fifth step of the step-up notice,
The set value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested by the effect mode at least partially different, such as the target image whose display color can be changed, such as the symbol display color and the outer frame display color. On the other hand, both the symbol display color and the outer frame display color can be changed to suggestive display colors including copper, silver, and gold, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with at least a part of the common presentation mode.
It is only necessary to be able to make suggestions regarding the setting values of . The pattern display color and the outer frame display color may be changeable to mutually different suggestive display colors. Alternatively, while the symbol display color can be changed in the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode other than the display color may be changed in the fifth step of the step-up notice. In the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode other than the symbol display color may be changed, while in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the outer frame display color may be changed. In the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode other than the symbol display color may be changed, and in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the effect mode other than the display color may be changed. In these cases, it is only necessary to suggest the setting of the pachinko game machine 1 by a completely different effect mode between the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern and the fifth step of the step-up notice.

The setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern may be executed at a timing different from the fifth step of the step-up notice. For example, after executing the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern, the effect mode may be changed to correspond to the fifth step of the step-up notice. Alternatively, the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern may be executed after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the fifth step of the step-up notice. Thus, after the specific timing in the specific period, suggestions regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made at a plurality of timings. In this case, depending on the mode of execution of the suggestive effect at one timing, the mode of execution of the suggestive effect at other timings may be varied. As an example, the ratio of whether or not to change the effect mode up to the fifth step in the step-up notice may be varied depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. When the suggestive effect at one timing is executed, the suggestive effect at other timings may be restricted so as not to be executed. For example, when the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, the decision value in the decision table may be set so that the pattern SU-5 is not decided as the step number pattern of the step-up notice. . With such a setting, the step-up notice can change the production mode up to the fifth step at a predetermined ratio within a range where the setting suggestion production using the ready-to-win pattern is not executed, while the setting suggestion using the ready-to-win pattern can be changed. In the range in which the performance is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the performance mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the production mode up to the fifth step at a high rate in the range where the setting suggestive effect using the ready-to-win pattern is not executed, while the setting suggestive effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a low rate within the range. Alternatively, the relationship between ranges and limits may be interchanged. In other words, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a predetermined rate within the range in which the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, while the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. In the range where the effect is not changed, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the presentation mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the production mode up to the fifth step at a high rate in the range where the setting suggestive effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed, while the setting suggestive effect using the ready-to-win pattern is executed. To the extent that it is not possible, a limit may be provided as a limit to change the presentation mode up to the fifth step at a low rate.

The setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern may also be provided with the same restriction as in the case of the step-up notice. For example, the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range where the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the 5th step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the 5th step. A limit may be set as a limit to the extent that the execution is not performed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a high rate within the range where the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the 5th step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the 5th step. A limit may be placed on the extent to which it is possible to perform at a lower rate. Alternatively, the relationship between ranges and limits may be interchanged. That is, the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range where the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the 5th step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the 5th step. A limit may be provided as a limit to the extent that it is not allowed to be executed.
In addition, the setting suggestive effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed at a high rate within the range where the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the 5th step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the 5th step. A limit may be provided as a limit to the extent that it is not allowed to be executed at a low rate.

In addition to the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-win pattern and the fifth step in the step-up notice, a plurality of suggestion performances are executed at a plurality of timings for any suggestion performance that can suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. If possible, depending on the execution mode of the suggestive effect at one timing, the execution mode of the suggestive effect at other timings may be varied. again,
Regarding an arbitrary suggestive performance capable of suggesting a set value of the pachinko game machine 1, when a plurality of suggestive performances can be executed at a plurality of timings, the suggestive performance at other timings is changed according to the suggestive performance at one timing. may be restricted.

FIGS. 9-12 show an execution example of setting suggesting effects using ready-to-win symbols. Figure 9-12 (
A) is an effect execution example 6 in the case where the form of variable display of the decoration pattern is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win is established.
6AK101 is shown. At this time, the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L,
At 5R, the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed to establish a reach.
A normal reach reach effect is executed. FIG. 9-12(B) is a production execution example 66 in the case where the ready-to-reach production of normal reach becomes the ready-to-reach production that shifts to the ready-to-reach production of super reach.
AK102 is shown. At this time, the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect image in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is displayed. Figure 9-1
2(C) shows an effect execution example 66AK103 when a change effect is executed. At this time, an effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the stop-displayed ready-to-win symbols, and an effect image notifying a message such as "Change the symbol display color!" A suggestion is made to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 9-12 (D1) corresponds to the case where the suggested setting pattern is pattern RE-0,
This shows an effect execution example 66AK111 in which the symbol display color does not change. FIG. 9-12 (D2) shows an effect execution example 66AK112 in which the symbol display color is changed to copper in response to the setting suggestion pattern being the pattern RE-1. FIG. 9-12 (D3) shows an effect execution example 66 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver in response to the setting suggestion pattern being the pattern RE-2.
AK113 is shown. Fig. 9-12 (D4) shows that the suggested setting pattern is pattern RE-3.
66AK114 shows an effect execution example 66AK114 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold corresponding to the case of . If the setting suggestion pattern is pattern RE-0, effect execution example 66AK111
, the display color of the reach symbol does not change, and the normal display color remains red. As a result, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. Setting suggestion pattern is pattern RE-1
, it suggests that the set value is 2 or more by changing the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to copper as in effect execution example 66AK112. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-2, the display color of the ready-to-win pattern is changed to silver as in the effect execution example 66AK113, thereby indicating that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player. Suggest. When the setting suggestion pattern is pattern RE-3, effect execution example 66AK11
By changing the display color of the ready-to-win pattern to gold like 4, it is suggested that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

FIGS. 9-13 show an execution example of the advance notice effect that is the step-up advance notice. Figure 9-13
(A) shows an effect execution example 66AK201 in the first step of the step-up notice. FIG. 9-13(B) is an effect execution example 6 in the second step of the step-up notice
6AK202 is shown. FIG. 9-13(C) shows an effect execution example 66AK203 in the third step of the step-up notice. FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 66AK204 in the fourth step of the step-up notice. Figure 9-13 (E1)
~ (E4) is a production execution example 66AK211 ~ in the fifth step of the step-up notice
66AK214 is shown. In the effects execution examples 66AK201 to 66AK204, the characters displayed by the frame-inside partial images are switched in order corresponding to the first step to the fourth step, thereby changing the effect mode step by step. Production execution example 66AK211
In 66AK214, corresponding to the fifth step, the character displayed by the partial image inside the frame is switched to all the characters displayed from the first step to the fourth step, thereby changing the presentation mode.

Further, in the effect execution examples 66AK211 to 66AK214, the display color of the outer frame partial image can be changed according to the outer frame display pattern. Production execution example 66A shown in FIG. 9-13 (E1)
In K211, the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-0, the outer frame display color does not change, and the normal display color red remains unchanged. As a result, a failure effect (fake effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the player's expectation, which is an advantageous set value, is low. In the effect execution example 66AK212 shown in FIG. 9-13 (E2), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-1, and the outer frame display color is changed to copper, so that the set value is 2.
Suggests confirmation of the above. Production execution example 66AK213 shown in FIG. 9-13 (E3)
, the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-2 and the outer frame display color is changed to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous set value. Figure 9-1
3 (E4) shows the effect execution example 66AK214, the outer frame display pattern is the pattern SC-3
Correspondingly, the display color of the outer frame is changed to gold, suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is fixed.

In general, it becomes difficult to raise the player's expectation even more after the announcement of the control to the jackpot game state is made. On the other hand, the characteristic part 66AK, after performing the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, after the specific timing of the specific period, the setting suggestion production using the ready-to-win pattern and the production mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice By providing a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is set even after the notification that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is performed. As expected, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, while the setting suggestion effect using the ready-to-win pattern can be executed, the suggestion regarding the set value by the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice may not be executed. Alternatively, while the setting suggesting effect using the ready-to-win symbol is not executed, the setting value may be suggested by the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice.

Along with the step-up announcement effect, the character announcement effect, and the title announcement effect, or in place of some or all of them, the chance-up effect may be made executable. The chance-up performance is a performance in which a character appears on the image display device 5 during the ready-to-win performance, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the contents of the character's lines. In addition, the performance mode of the chance-up performance may be any performance mode that can suggest the degree of expectation for the big win to the player, and may not be the performance that suggests the degree of expectation for the big win depending on the content of the character's lines.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process. When the variable display result is a big hit, whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution is determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a big win and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加to determine. If the variable display result is a loss, whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution is determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a loss and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加to determine.

FIGS. 9-14 show setting examples of effect patterns that can be determined when executing the chance-up effect. In this setting example, four patterns CU-1 to CU-4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined when executing the chance-up effect. The pattern CU-1 is a performance pattern indicating that the degree of expectation for a big win is low (expectation for a big win: low), and the pattern CU-2 has a higher degree of expectation for a big win than the pattern CU-1 (expectation for a big win: high). It is a production pattern showing that. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are
This is an effect pattern for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit. Pattern CU-
Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are both production patterns for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit, but the production modes are different.

FIG. 9-15(A) shows a setting example of ratios for determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution when the variable display result is a big win. In this determination example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is determined that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 39%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10%. Decide to execute with 1, pattern C with chance up effect at a rate of 40%
Decided to run at U-2, pattern CU-3 for chance up production at a rate of 10%
, and decides to execute the chance-up effect in pattern CU-4 at a rate of 1%. 38% when the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 2
non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the chance-up performance is determined by the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%, and chance-up performance is performed by the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%. Decided to do so, pattern CU-
It decides to execute pattern CU-3, and decides to execute chance-up effect in pattern CU-4 at a rate of 2%. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, 37
10% to execute the chance-up performance in pattern CU-1, and 40% to execute the chance-up performance in pattern CU-2. Decide to do, pattern CU for chance up production at a rate of 10%
-3 is decided to be executed, and the chance-up effect is decided to be executed in pattern CU-4 at a rate of 3%. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, 3
A 6% ratio determines non-execution of the chance-up production, a 10% ratio decides to execute the chance-up production in the pattern CU-1, and a 40% ratio decides to execute the chance-up production in the pattern CU-2. Decided to execute, pattern C with a chance up effect at a rate of 10%
It decides to execute U-3, and decides to execute the chance-up effect in pattern CU-4 at a rate of 4%. If the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5,
35% of the ratio determines non-execution of the chance-up production, 10% of the ratio decides to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-1, and 40% of the ratio decides to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-2. Decided to execute, decided to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to perform the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 5%.
decide to run in When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 34%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. is determined, 40% of the time it decides to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-2, 10% of the time decides to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-3, and 6% of the time. Pattern CU- for chance-up production
4 decides to run.

FIG. 9-15(B) shows a setting example of ratios for determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution when the variable display result is a loss. In this determination example, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the chance-up effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 50%, and the chance-up effect is performed at a rate of 40%.
Decided to execute at -1, decided to execute chance-up production with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 10%, decided to execute chance-up production with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 0%. Then, it decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 0%.

By setting the determination ratio as described above, among the cases where the chance-up performance is executed, when the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-1, the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state is low (the expectation of the big win is low). ), and when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, the ratio of control to the big win game state is high (high expectation of big win). When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the game is always controlled to a big win game state. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 is common (uniformly 10%) regardless of the set value, whereas the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3.
4 is set to increase as the set value increases. Therefore, the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4
CU-4 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and in particular, the set value is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4. ing.

As in pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, the determination ratio of the chance-up effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the set value is 1 is 11%, 12% when the set value is 2, 13% when the set value is 3, 14% when the set value is 4, 15% when the set value is 5, and 6 is 16%, which differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern for reporting that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, and the pachinko game machine. It is set to increase as the set value set to 1 increases.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (chance-up effect control pattern) is selected and set as a use pattern in response to the decision to execute the chance-up effect. may Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the chance-up effect process timer, the chance-up effect may be executed according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table for the chance-up effect is set, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is updated each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the effect device (image display device 5 or The chance-up effect may be executed by controlling the speakers 8L, 8R, effect lamp 9, etc.).

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is the effect pattern of the big hit notification, is executed when the chance-up effect is executed. When it is determined that it is a performance pattern for informing a big win, whether or not to execute a set value suggestion performance and the performance pattern in the case of execution are determined based on the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加.

FIGS. 9-16 show setting examples of effect patterns that can be determined when the set value suggesting effect is executed. In this setting example, five effect patterns SS-1 to SS-5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined when executing the set value suggesting effect. Pattern SS-1 suggests that the set values may be odd numbers (eg 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests that the set values may be even numbers (eg 2, 4, 6). pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 suggests that the setting value is an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, , 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Pattern SS-1 and pattern SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the setting value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the expectation of something is low, and pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is either 5 or 6, so that the set value is 5 or 6. Expectations are high. Here, setting values 1 to 4 are set to low and setting values 5 and 6 are set to high.
Setting values 1 to 3 may be set to low, setting values 4 to 6 may be set to high, setting values 1 and 2 may be set to low,
Setting values 3 and 4 may be intermediate settings and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings to set the performance pattern execution ratio.

FIGS. 9-17 show setting examples of ratios for determining whether or not to execute the set value suggestion effect and the pattern of effect in the case of execution. In this setting example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and 7.1.
5% decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-1, 2.35% decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-2, and 0.36% Decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.14%, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% It is decided to execute the value suggesting effect in pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 85%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 3.21% in pattern SS-1. , decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 10.73%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.21%. decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.85%, and set value suggestion effect at a rate of 0% in pattern SS-4.
Decide to run at -5. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the set value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 11.45% in pattern SS-1. , decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.85%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 4.28%. and set value suggestion effect at a rate of 1.42% for pattern S
It decides to execute in S-4, and decides to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. If the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, 75
% determines non-execution of the set value suggestion effect, 3.57% determines to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-1, and 14.30% sets value suggestion effect. decided to be executed in pattern SS-2, and set value suggestion production at a rate of 1.78% pattern SS-
Decide to execute in 3, decide to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 5.35%, and execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. to decide. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 4.28% in the pattern SS-.
1, decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 8.57%, and set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 10.73%. 6.42% of the time it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4, and 0% of the time it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5. decide.
When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the set value suggesting effect is performed at a rate of 10.00% (pattern SS-1). , decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 5.00%, and executed the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 5.00%. 12.50% of the time, it is determined that pattern SS-4 will be used for the setting value suggestion effect, and 2.5% of the time, pattern SS-5 will be used to perform the setting value suggestion effect. to decide.

By setting such a determination ratio, the setting value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 or pattern SS
-2 suggests that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the setting value is 5 by executing the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. or 6 is suggested. Also, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the execution of the setting value suggestion effect is determined.

FIG. 9-18 shows an effect execution period in the variable display of super reach when the chance-up effect or set value suggestion effect is executed. The chance-up effect and the set value suggesting effect are effects that can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect during variable display of super reach. The set value suggesting performance can be executed after the chance-up performance when it is executed in a pattern CU-3 or CU-4 for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to a big win game state. The set value suggesting effect is an effect that suggests the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying an effect image showing one or all of a plurality of characters on the image display device 5. be. In addition, the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect may be any effect mode that can suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and does not have to be the effect mode using a plurality of characters.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (set value suggestive effect control patterns) are prepared in response to the determination to execute the set value suggestive effect.
may be selected and set as the usage pattern. Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the set value suggesting effect process timer, it may be possible to execute the set value suggesting effect according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table for the set value suggestion effect is set, the value of the set value suggestion effect process timer is updated each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the effect device (image display device 5 and speaker 8
L, 8R, effect effect lamp 9, etc.) may be controlled to execute the set value suggesting effect.

When a predetermined period of time elapses after the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is started, a character is displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 as a chance-up performance, and character information, etc. with different lines according to the performance pattern are displayed as the lines of the character. be done. In particular, when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the result of the variable display is a big win depending on the words displayed on the image display device 5, and after the end of the variable display, a big win game state is entered. It is notified that it is controlled.

Pattern CU-3 and pattern C for chance-up effect during reach effect of super reach
When executed in U-4, the images of any one or all characters out of a plurality of characters are displayed as the setting value suggesting effect after a specific period has elapsed after the chance-up effect is finished. For example, when the setting value suggesting effects are executed in patterns SS-1 to SS-4, different character images are displayed on the image display device 5 respectively.
When the set value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-5 (when the set value suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode informing that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6) On the image display device 5, all characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed when the set value suggestion effects are executed in patterns SS-1 to SS-4. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to which character image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the set value suggesting effect, and the number of character images displayed on the image display device 5 is also made to be noticed by the player. It is possible to improve the game interest. The ratio of executing the chance-up performance in the performance pattern for informing that the chance-up performance is controlled to the jackpot game state differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

The chance-up effect can suggest to the player the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the ratio of execution in the effect pattern for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. To improve amusement in a game by attracting the player's attention to the up performance.
The set value suggesting effect can be executed after the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is a pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is a pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, which is a pattern for informing control to a jackpot game state during the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Since the execution ratio of the set value suggestion performance is set to be higher as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases, the set value suggestion performance is executed after the chance up performance. To draw a player's attention and improve amusement in the game.

The specific suggestive effect may be a chance-up effect executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, or "when a specific display result (variable display result is a big hit), an advantageous state (jackpot game In a game machine (pachinko game machine) controlled to a state), before the specific display result is displayed (derivation display), especially if it is "an effect that notifies that it is controlled to an advantageous state", that effect mode does not matter. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state may be lower as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is larger. Pattern CU-3 of special suggestion production with chance up production
and pattern CU-4, and the predetermined effect may be a set value suggestive effect different in the effect mode from the chance-up effect, but the special suggestive effect and the predetermined effect may be the same effect mode, or the special suggestive effect and the predetermined effect may be executed as a series of effects. As the predetermined effect different from the special suggestive effect and the effect mode, for example, it may be applied to an effect such as a ready-to-win effect of super reach, which is not necessarily an effect to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. By making it possible to execute only the chance-up production out of the chance-up production and the setting value suggestion production,
The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested only by the chance-up effect.

The chance-up performance is provided as a performance pattern for informing that two performance patterns, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, are controlled to a jackpot game state, and the chance-up performance is the pattern CU-3. While the execution ratio is 10% in common regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the chance-up effect is the pattern CU.
The ratio of execution at -4 differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is the pattern CU- for the chance-up effect.
4, the player is made to pay attention to which pattern CU-3 or CU-4 the chance-up effect is executed, and the interest of the suggestive effect is enhanced. can be improved.

As the performance pattern of the chance-up performance, three or more performance patterns for notifying that the game is controlled to the big win game state may be provided. Of the performance patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is to be controlled, only the execution ratio of some performance patterns may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, or all the performances may be changed. Pachinko machine 1 for pattern execution ratio
You may make it differ according to the setting value set to. After executing one performance pattern (for example, pattern CU-3) for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state, the other performance notifies that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state. A pattern (for example, pattern CU-4) may be executable. In this case, the content to be notified to the player may differ according to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed. For example, when the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 during the variable display of 1, only the fact that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is notified, and the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU- during the variable display of 1.例文帳に追加3 and pattern CU-4 are executed twice, in addition to notification of being controlled to the jackpot game state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set within a predetermined range (for example, 4 to 6 range). A pachinko game machine 1 is provided by executing a chance-up performance with a pattern CU-3 and a pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1.
It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the setting value set to is any of 4-6. Also, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 depending on the number of times the performance pattern for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to the jackpot game state is executed during the variable display of 1. It is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not it is, and to improve the amusement of the game. The special suggestive effect may be a chance-up effect to be executed first, and the special effect may be a chance-up effect to be executed later. When the chance-up effect is executed in patterns CU-3 and CU-4 during the variable display of 1, the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not have to overlap, and the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not have to overlap. At least a portion may overlap. When the special suggestion performance and the special performance are executed within a specific period, the execution period of the special suggestion performance and the execution period of the special performance do not overlap, and the execution period of the special suggestion performance and the execution period of the special performance at least partially overlap. When the chance-up effect is executed with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, both chance-up effects may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. The execution of the special suggestion effect and the special effect within a specific period includes execution of both chance-up effects during one variable display and execution of both chance-up effects over a plurality of variable displays. includes both. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1, a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the number of executions of the chance-up effects executed during the variable display of 1, and a plurality of values are suggested. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested by the number of times of execution of the chance-up effects executed during the plurality of variable displays. . The pattern CU-3 notifies that the jackpot game state is controlled and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example, any one of 1, 2, and 6) ), and pattern CU-4 notifies that it is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is within a range different from that of pattern CU-3. (For example, the range of 4 to 6) may be provided as an effect pattern. In this example, pattern CU-3 notifies that the set value is one of 1, 2, or 6, and pattern CU-4 notifies that the set value is one of 4 to 6. The value is determined to be 6.
In this way, during the variable display in which the chance-up effect is 1, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-
4, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested more accurately. In the case where the chance-up effect is executed twice in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, whether or not the effect periods of both chance-up effects overlap, and whether or not both chance-up effects are performed. A set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested according to the length of overlap of the presentation period.

Instead of the patterns CU-3 and CU-4, the chance-up performance can be executed a plurality of times by the pattern CU-2, which is a performance pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, and these chance-up performances are executed by the pattern CU-2. The suggested content may be different depending on the number of times the message is given. Specifically, the period from the start of the variable display to reaching the reach, the period from reaching the reach to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and the period from the start of the reach effect of the super reach to the variable display A chance-up performance can be executed once each in a period until the end (three-time chance-up performance can be executed during one variable display), and a big win is expected when the chance-up performance is executed only once. When the chance-up performance is executed twice, it is suggested that the game state will be controlled to a big win game state, and when the chance-up performance is executed three times, it is set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加It may be set so as to notify that the current set value is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

For example, when the suggested content is changed according to the number of executions of pattern CU-2,
A variable display result is specified at the start of the variable display, and when the variable display result is a loss or a small hit, execution of the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up performance is determined only once. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is further specified. If the set value is any one of 1 to 5, pattern CU-2 of chance up production
is determined to be executed once or twice, and the set value is 6, execution of the chance-up effect pattern CU-2 may be determined to be one to three times. In the case where the suggested contents are changed according to the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, first, the number of executions of the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is determined by lottery, and the variable display result and the pachinko machine 1 are set. The number of times of execution may be re-determined according to the set value.

The ratio of executing the chance-up production in the production pattern for informing that the chance-up production is controlled to the jackpot game state is, for example, the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the pattern CU-4. It is the sum of the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 according to the set value and the chance-up effect in pattern C
It may be different from the rate of execution at U-4. In this case, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the execution ratio of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are effect patterns for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, is sent to the player. by suggesting
The interest in the chance-up performance can be improved. A setting value change suggesting effect indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed may be made executable. Especially pachinko machine 1
When a setting value change suggestion performance is executed on the day after a low setting value is suggested by a chance-up performance or the like, the player is made to expect that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the game of the player can be promoted. The performance period of the set value suggestion performance may be set longer than the performance period of the chance-up performance. By doing so, as evidence that the game has been played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the high setting value is set, the period during which the player shoots an image of the setting value suggesting effect with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone is shortened. can be secured. In addition, in the case where the period for the player to take the image of the set value suggesting effect is secured by setting the effect period of the set value suggesting effect longer than the effect period of the chance up effect in this way, the chance up is further increased. Production is pattern CU-3 and pattern CU
By making it possible to execute an effect suggesting that the setting value suggesting effect will be executed after being executed in -4, the player who recognizes the effect prepares the mobile terminal before the set value suggesting effect starts. You may make it possible. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU- are used as production patterns for chance-up production only when the type of jackpot that is most advantageous to the player is determined in the variable special figure.
4 may be determinable.

The special suggestion effect may be an effect (a so-called all-rotation ready-to-win effect) in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in combination with a big hit. When it is possible to execute the pseudo-continuous effect of repeating the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decoration pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variable display of the decorative pattern up to the upper limit number of times as the pseudo-continuous effect may be the special suggestive effect. When it is possible to execute the pending display notice effect of notifying the variable display result in the display mode of the pending memory display for the variable display that has not been executed yet, the display of the pending memory display in gold, rainbow color, etc. is a special suggestive effect. may be In addition, light emission in the form of notifying the big win of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R notifying the big win, operation of a specific movable body, or a combination of some or all of these are specially suggested. It can also be used as a performance. When it is possible to execute all-rotation reach, pseudo-continuous effect, holding memory display effect, light emission of game effect lamp 9, sound output from speakers 8 and 8R, movement of movable body, etc., which are special suggestive effects, these special Different setting values may be suggested by combining suggestive effects and changing the effect mode of the special suggestive effect to be executed later. For example, after it is notified that the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols are executed up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 4 times) as a pseudo-continuous effect and the control to the jackpot game state is performed, the all-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed. , as this all-rotation ready-to-reach production, if the direction of variable display of the decorative pattern is directed downward, it is notified that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and as this all-rotation ready-to-win production, the variable display of the decorative pattern is notified. If the direction is from the left to the right, it is notified that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and as this all-rotation ready-to-win performance, the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device as seen from the player. The fact that the set value is 6 may be notified from the far side of 5 toward the near side. Alternatively, after the game effect lamp 9 emits rainbow color light at the start of the variable display to inform that the jackpot game state is controlled, the speaker 8L,
If melody A is output from 8R, it is notified that the set value is any one of 1 to 3, and if melody B is output from speakers 8L and 8R, it is notified that the set value is any one of 4 to 6. If the melody C is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, it may be notified that the set value is 6. Alternatively, when the pending memory display is displayed in rainbow color, the variable display result corresponding to the pending memory display becomes a big win (controlled to the big win game state after the end of the variable display).
After is notified, the movable body A operates until the variable display for the big win ends, thereby announcing that the set value is any one of 1 to 3, and the variable display for the big win ends. By the time the movable body B operates, it is notified that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and both the movable bodies A and B operate before the variable display of the big hit ends. , it may be notified that the set value is 6.

When the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested in both the chance-up performance and the set-value suggestion performance, the set values suggested in the chance-up performance and the set values suggested in the set-value suggestion performance are individually set. , it is conceivable that the contents of these suggestions do not match depending on the presentation mode of the chance-up presentation and the set value suggestion presentation. So, for example,
If the set value is not suggested in the chance-up effect, such as when the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 is not determined, the set value may be suggested only by the set value suggestion effect. Pattern CU-3 or pattern C only when non-execution of suggestive effect is determined
A set value may be suggested in the chance-up effect, such as determining execution at U-4. A store clerk or the like of a game hall can change whether or not to suggest a setting value as a chance-up effect, and the ratio of execution/non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect, by using a performance adjustment function or the like provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加good too.

In addition to the chance-up performance, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested by any performance such as a pseudo-continuous performance or a look-ahead notice performance, and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. The feature part 66AK can be applied to an arbitrary effect as long as the effect is capable of suggesting a setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 after making a suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state during execution of the variable display. can. For example, in the case of executing an arbitrary effect, after suggesting the control of the jackpot game state, the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued, and the suggestion about the control of the jackpot game state is continued. In addition, it is sufficient if it includes the case of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. Alternatively, in the case of executing an arbitrary performance, after making a suggestion about the control of the big win game state, when the suggestion ends, or when the suggestion about the control of the big win game state is continued and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It may also include cases where suggestions regarding values are made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different decision ratios depending on whether the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. Alternatively, the outer frame display pattern may include a pattern with a different determination ratio depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by suggesting the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate. can be diversified to improve amusement.

Part or all of the specific period, or part or all of the specific period after the specific timing may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, during execution of the variable display, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state may be made, while suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, the display result of the variable display is "big hit"
In this case, the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested along with the execution of the jackpot start production (fanfare production) and the jackpot middle production (production corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). good too. There may be a case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot game state.

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or execution of an action different. Any content that is different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, degree of reduction, etc.) may be used.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 66AK)
A gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player are, for example, 1 to 6. Can be set to any set value among such as, for example, setting means such as the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A, and a suggestive effect can be executed over a specific period, for example An image display device 5 and an effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 are provided, and the effect execution means is, for example, as shown in FIGS. After suggesting the control of the advantageous state, as an effect that can be executed after a specific timing, for example, when the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decoration pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion about the control of the advantageous state is continued. A first suggestion performance to be performed, and a second suggestion performance to continue to suggest the control of the advantageous state and to suggest the setting of the setting means, such as when the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7. Of these, any one of the suggestion effects can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game by enabling execution of either the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect after the specific timing.

Alternatively, in a gaming machine such as pachinko gaming machine 1, which is advantageous to the player and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state, for example, 1 CPU of the game control microcomputer 100 that can be set to one of the set values such as ~ 6, for example, executing the set value change process in step S6A
103 and the like, and effect executing means such as the image display device 5 and the effect control CPU 120 capable of executing the suggestive effect over a specific period.
As shown in -13, after making a suggestion regarding control of an advantageous state until a specific timing in a specific period, for example, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is less than 5, a first suggestion rendering that ends the suggestion; For example, if the number of steps in the step-up notice is 5,
As the effect that can be executed after the specific timing, any one of the second suggesting effect of continuously suggesting the control of the advantageous state and suggesting the setting of the setting means can be executed.
According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made until the specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made even after the specific timing, the amusement of the game can be improved. can be done.

The specific period may be included in the execution period of variable display in which at least the ready-to-win effect can be executed, such as the period after timing T2, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

The reach mode of the variable display includes a plurality of types of reach modes with different ratios of being controlled in an advantageous state, such as reach patterns with decoration patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, and the effect execution means is a reach of the variable display. After becoming a mode, for example, the pattern display color is copper, silver, gold, etc.
The reach mode may be changeable to a specific mode.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

After the specific timing, the effect executing means may, for example, set pattern R
It may be possible to execute different forms of effects according to the settings of the setting means, such as effects corresponding to E-0 to RE-3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

The performance executing means changes the performance mode step by step from one stage to a plurality of stages such as a step-up notice performance, and as the number of stages in which the performance mode is changed increases, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state increases. It may be possible to execute a suggestive effect.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

The plurality of stages include, for example, the 4th step of the step-up notice effect, which is an advantageous state notification step for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state, and the 5th step of the step-up notice effect, for example, which indicates the setting of the setting means. After the effect execution means changes the effect mode to the advantageous state notification stage, the effect execution means can change the effect mode to the setting suggestion stage after a specific timing. As shown at 9-11, the setting suggestion stage may have a longer execution period than the advantage notification stage.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by increasing the degree of attention to the presentation.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portion 66AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding other characteristic portions.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 017AK)
Next, feature 017AK will be described. The pachinko machine 1 of the characteristic part 017AK is
A special effect can be executed based on the player's action (operation to the operating means, etc.). The special effect is that the player performs an action when a special effect (for example, a pre-reading announcement effect that vibrates the push button 31B, etc.) is being executed that suggests the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state. and a second pattern executed based on the action of the player when the special effect is not executed. Then, the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is different between when the first pattern of special performance is executed and when the second pattern of special performance is executed. In this way, the characteristic portion 017
In the AK pachinko game machine 1, the degree of expectation for the special effect differs depending on the presence or absence of the special effect.
It is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not the special performance is executed. This improves the interest in the game.

In the characteristic portion 017AK, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of button effects as button effects executed based on the operation of the push button 31B. FIG. 10-1 shows the button effect type of the characteristic portion 017AK. As shown in FIG. 10-1, feature 017A
K can execute a look-ahead button announcement, a fluctuating button announcement, and a back button effect as button effects. The push button 31B of the characteristic portion 017AK is internally provided with a vibration mechanism such as a vibration motor, and is configured to vibrate (vibrate) under the control of the effect control CPU 120 .

The pre-reading button notice is a button effect as a pre-reading notice effect that is executed based on the judgment result by pre-reading the display result and the variation pattern at the time of occurrence of the start winning. When it is decided to execute the pre-reading button announcement, the push button 31B vibrates at the time of starting winning, and the accessory (movable accessory for production) becomes operable in response to the detection of the pressing operation during the vibration. ing.
In this embodiment, the vibration of the push button 31B is also called button vibration, and the effect of button vibration is also called special effect. In this embodiment, there are cases in which the accessory moves in response to detection of a pressing operation during button vibration, and cases in which the accessory does not move. In the pre-reading button announcement, a special effect is executed in response to the start winning, and the role is operated in response to the detection of the pressing operation during the operation valid period, so that the expectation of a big hit is high. It is suggested. The operation effective period of the prefetch button notice is, for example, the execution period of the special effect.

The in-variation button announcement is a button effect as an in-variation announcement effect that is executed based on the display result of the variation and the variation pattern during the variation. When it is decided to execute the button notice during fluctuation at the start of the fluctuation, an operation prompting performance for prompting the operation of the push button 31B during the fluctuation is executed. Then, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by the action of the accessory in response to the detection of the pressing operation during the operation valid period. The operation effective period of the in-varying button notice is, for example, the execution period of the operation promotion effect.

In this embodiment, the accessory that operates in response to the operation of the push button 31B is, for example, L
It is a role object (movable object) having a display unit such as a CD or an organic EL, and is configured to be movable to the front side of the image display device 5 . When the accessory with the display part is not used for performance, it is in a state of being housed in an invisible position on the back side of the game board 2 above the image display device 5 . Note that the accessory that operates in response to the operation of the push button 31B is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and may be any accessory that is provided at an arbitrary position and configured to be operable.

The back button effect is an advance notice effect executed based on the display result of the variation during super reach. When it is decided to execute the back button announcement, the game effect lamp 9 at a predetermined position lights up in response to detection of a predetermined operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) to the push button 31B during super reach. The back button effect is performed secretly without notifying that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. The back button effect is also called a hidden button effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the operation prompting effect is executed only for the in-varying button notice. The operation effective period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid in each button effect is lengthened in the order of prefetch button notice <fluctuation button notice <back button effect. Also, the reliability of each button effect (the degree of expectation for a big hit at the time of execution) is different, and in this embodiment, it is higher in the order of fluctuation button announcement <back button effect <prefetch button announcement. In addition, a function (automatic repeated hitting function) which assumes that a repeated hitting operation has been performed when the push button 31B is pressed for a long time is enabled only during the back button presentation.

In the characteristic portion 017AK, the effect (character object action, lamp lighting) executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is also called special effect. In this embodiment, there is one accessory that can be moved in the special effect, but a plurality of accessories that can be moved in the special effect may be provided. Also, the character that operates may be different depending on the special effect. In addition, the special effect executed according to the action of the player in the present embodiment is the effect that the character object moves or the lamp lights up in response to the button operation, but the notice image is displayed or the sound is output. It may be a production that is Also, the player's motion is detected by operating the push button 31B, but the player's motion may be detected by operating other operating means (for example, the stick controller 31A) or by a sensor or the like.

In the pre-reading button notice, when the special effect (button vibration) is being executed, the special effect (effect of moving the character) executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B is the first It becomes a special production of the pattern. In addition, in the variable button notice, when the special effect is not being executed, the special effect (effect of moving the character) executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B is the second pattern of the characteristic portion 017AK. A special performance.
Then, in the characteristic portion 017AK, the degree of expectation for a big win differs between when the special effect of the first pattern is executed and when the special effect of the second pattern is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player have an element of intervening in the game to improve interest, and to draw the player's attention to the presence or absence of the special effect. In addition, in this embodiment, the special effect of the first pattern with a special effect (special effect in the pre-reading button notice) is better than the special effect of the second pattern without special effect (special effect in the variable button notice). The expectation of a big hit when executed is higher than that. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively perform the action when the special performance is being executed.

FIG. 10-2 is a timing chart showing execution timings of the special effect (accessory action). When a start winning prize occurs during fluctuation and it is decided to execute the prefetch button notice, FIG.
As shown at -2, the button vibrate is turned on. At this time, when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, a special effect of the first pattern in which the character moves is executed. Further, when it is determined to execute the in-variation button announcement in the subsequent variation, the operation prompting effect is executed at a predetermined timing of the variation. Then, when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, a special effect of the second pattern in which the character moves is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the special effect of the first pattern ends before the special effect of the second pattern is executed. By doing so, both special effects can be executed without overlapping execution timings of both special effects, and the interest of the effects is improved. In addition, since the first pattern of special effects (forecast button notice) and the second pattern of special effects (fluctuation button notice) can be executed for the same target, the effects are diversified and special effects can be performed. Opportunities can be secured. In addition, execution of one special effect does not restrict the other special effect, so that interest does not decrease.

In addition, when executing the second pattern special effect (fluctuation button notice) after executing the first pattern special effect (forecast button notice) for the same target, only the second pattern special effect may be performed in a different manner. For example, in a state in which the character object moved by the special effect of the first pattern stands by at the position after the movement, the operation promotion effect related to the notice of the button during fluctuation is executed, and the special effect of the second pattern is performed according to the operation. may be executed. Such a special effect of the second pattern may be a chance-up (suggesting an increase in expectations) effect during the reach effect of the super reach.

Further, by preventing the execution timings of the special effects of the first pattern and the special effects of the second pattern from overlapping, it is not limited to being able to execute both special effects. By using different effect devices for the special effect of one pattern and the special effect of the second pattern, both special effects may be executed at the same timing.

Next, the operation of the characteristic portion 017AK will be described. FIG. 10-3(A) shows the characteristic part 01
7 is a flow chart showing the operation of pre-reading notice setting processing of 7AK. The advance notice setting process is executed in step S161 of FIG. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120
First, by checking the received command buffer of the RAM 122 or the like, it is determined whether or not the start winning designation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 017AKS001).
If the start winning designation command has been received (step 017AKS001; Yes), processing for displaying a pending display (or active display) on the image display device 5 is performed (step 017AKS002). At step 017AKS002, a pre-reading forewarning effect (withholding display forewarning, withholding change forewarning) for notifying that a big hit will be achieved by the display mode of the pending display may be executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a special effect in-progress flag indicating that a special effect (button vibration) is being executed is in an ON state (step 017AKS003). If the special effect in progress flag is off (step 017AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect is in progress (step 017AKS004). Whether or not the reach performance of the super reach is being performed may be determined from the performance control pattern or the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation.

In this embodiment, when the flag during special effect is ON (step 017AKS00
3; Yes), that is, if the special effect has already been executed, step 017AKS to be described later
By moving to step 017AKS011 without executing the process of 005, etc., the special effect based on the new starting prize is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions and inconsistencies in the performance due to the determination that the special performance is to be further executed during the execution of the special performance (button vibe). Incidentally, even during the execution of the special effect, the special effect may be executed based on the new start prize winning. For example, after the end of the special performance being executed, the special performance based on the new starting prize may be executed, or the execution period of the special performance being executed may be extended based on the new start winning. good. By doing so, the special effects are diversified and the interest is improved.

Also, when the reach performance of super reach is in progress (step 017AKS004;
Yes), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated because the special effect is not executed. In this way, in the characteristic part 017AK, the special effect is not executed when the ready-to-win effect of the super reach is being performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ready-to-win effect from being hindered by starting the special effect even though the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win is being executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from making the player misunderstand that the special performance is a performance related to the ready-to-win performance being executed (for example, a performance to improve the expectation of the ready-to-win), thereby making the player expect more than necessary.

Further, the special effect may not be executed even when another predetermined effect (an effect indicating the degree of expectation such as another advance notice effect or pseudo-continuation) is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance from being hindered by starting the special performance while another predetermined performance is being executed. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting more than necessary by making the player misunderstand that the special performance is a performance related to a predetermined performance being executed (for example, a performance that increases the expectation of the advance notice performance). It should be noted that while the special effect is being executed, the predetermined effect may be limited, or the predetermined effect may be executed without being limited.

If it is not during the reach performance of super reach (step 017AKS004; N
o), it is determined whether or not to execute a special effect (step 017AKS005). step 01
In 7AKS005, the display result specified from the start winning designation command (winning judgment result)
Based on, for example, at the ratio shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, after a special effect (button vibe) is executed, a production pattern (a production pattern in which a special production is executed) in which a character moves in response to the operation of the push button 31B, and a special production ( A performance pattern (a performance pattern in which a special performance is not executed) is provided in which the accessory does not operate even if the push button 31B is operated after the button vibration) is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, it is judged that the special effect will be executed at a higher rate than when the result is a loss, and when the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit. The ratio of determination to the performance pattern with the character action is higher than in the case of failure. As a result, it is possible to foresee and suggest that a big hit will occur depending on the presence or absence of a special effect and the presence or absence of a role action (special effect) when the push button 31B is operated.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special effect is executed based only on whether the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit or a loss, but the variation pattern determined at the time of winning (presence or absence and type of reach, presence or absence of pseudo-run, etc.) You may make it determine the execution presence or absence of a special production|presentation, and a production|presentation pattern based on.

In this embodiment, only the button vibration special effect can be executed, but there may be a plurality of types of special effect effects. For example, the push button 31B may be provided with a lamp so that it can be turned on, and an effect mode may be provided in which the push button 31B is turned on.

In this way, as a special effect, the push button 31B is vibrated or lit as detection means capable of detecting the action of the player.
It is possible to make B pay attention or be interested, and to prompt the player to intervene in the game by performing actions.

If it is determined at step 017AKS005 that the special effect is not to be executed (step 017AKS006; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. Step 017AKS00
If it is determined in step 5 to execute a special effect (step 017AKS006; Yes)
, the control for starting the special effect is executed (step 017AKS007). At step 017AKS007, execution of a special effect (button vibration) is started based on the effect control data for vibrating the push button 31B for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

Subsequently, the special effect execution flag indicating that the special effect is being executed is set to ON state (step 017AKS008), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If the start winning designation command has not been received (step 017AKS001; No),
It is determined whether or not a special effect in-progress flag indicating that a special effect (button vibration) is being executed is on (step 017AKS010). If the special effect in-progress flag is off (step 017AKS010; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If it is determined at step 017AKS003 or step 017AKS010 that the special effect flag is on (step 017AKS003; Yes, step 0
17AKS010; Yes), push button 31 in special effect (forecast button notice)
It is determined whether or not the valid operation period during which the operation to B is valid has expired (step 017AK).
S011). For example, the period during which the button vibration is performed is set as the operation effective period, and when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the button vibration started, the button vibration ends and the operation effective period ends. .

If the operation effective period of the special effect (forecast button notice) has not expired (step 017A
KS011; No), and by determining whether or not there is an operation signal from the push button 31B, it is determined whether or not an operation to press the push button 31B has been detected (step 017A).
KS012). If the pressing operation to the push button 31B is not detected (step 01
7AKS012; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

When the pressing operation to the push button 31B is detected (step 017AKS012; Y
es), it is determined whether or not it is a performance pattern with a character action (step 017AKS0).
13). If it is a performance pattern with a character action (step 017AKS013; Y
es), and executes control for operating the character (step 017AKS014). At step 017AKS014, control for executing the first pattern special effect (first special effect) is executed based on the effect control data corresponding to the effect operation of the character when the operation is detected in the pre-reading button notice. .

When the operation effective period of the special effect (forecast button notice) has expired (step 017AKS
012; Yes), when the control for moving the accessory is executed in step 017AKS014, the control for stopping the button vibration and ending the special effect is executed (step 017AKS015). After that, the flag during special effect is reset to OFF state (step 017AKS016), and the pre-reading notice setting process is finished.

If it is not a performance pattern with role object motion (step 017AKS013; No),
A setting suggestion effect process for executing a setting suggestion effect is executed (step 017AKS01
7).

In the setting suggestion effect processing, the setting value currently set in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified, and a setting suggestion effect (also referred to as a set value suggestion effect) suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. Decide whether or not Then, when the setting-suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode (effect pattern) of the setting-suggestion effect is determined based on, for example, the specified setting value. Then, processing for executing the setting suggestion effect in the determined effect mode is included.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the special effect is being executed, the push button 31
In spite of the operation of B, when it is not the performance pattern with the role product motion and the special performance (the role product motion) is not executed, the setting suggesting performance can be executed. As a result, an advantageous set value may be suggested, so that it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the special effect was not executed.

In the characteristic portion 017AK, for example, a plurality of types of effect patterns for setting value suggestion effects as shown in FIGS. 9-16 are provided. The set value suggesting effect may be any effect in which an image or characters corresponding to the effect pattern are displayed on the image display device 5 when the push button 31B is pressed, for example. Note that the mode of presentation and the means of presentation may be arbitrary as long as the set value can be suggested. Then, in the setting suggesting effect process, whether or not to execute the set value suggesting effect and the effect pattern in the case of execution may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-17, for example. Further, in the setting suggesting effect process, when it is determined to execute the set value suggesting effect, control is performed for executing the set value suggesting effect in the determined effect pattern.

As for the setting suggesting effect (set value suggesting effect), the characteristic portion 66AK may be appropriately adopted as the characteristic portion 017AK. For example, instead of executing the setting suggestion effect immediately after pressing the push button 31B, the setting suggestion effect is executed at an arbitrary timing after that (for example, during the symbol color during reach or during other notice effects). may

For example, like the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 66AK, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect over a specific period, for example, the image display device 5, and the effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120. The effect executing means is, for example, As shown in FIG. 9-12, until a specific timing in a specific period, for example, by a decorative pattern that is a reach pattern, etc., after suggesting control of an advantageous state, after the specific timing, for example, reach The first to continue to suggest the control of the advantageous state, such as when the pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7
Suggestion production and, for example, when the ready-to-win pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, the second suggestion production that continues to suggest the control of the advantageous state and also suggests the setting of the setting means. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the suggestion effect. That is, when it is determined in step 017AKS017 that the setting suggesting effect is to be executed, the second suggesting effect may be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game by enabling execution of either the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect after the specific timing.

In addition, like other pachinko game machines 1 related to the characteristic portion 66AK, it is equipped with an effect execution means such as an image display device 5 and a effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect over a specific period, and the effect execution means is , for example, as shown in FIGS. 9 to 13, until a specific timing in a specific period, after suggesting control of an advantageous state, for example, when the number of steps in the step-up notice is less than 5, the suggestion is terminated. Suggestion performance and, for example, when the number of steps of step-up notice is 5, as a performance that can be executed after a specific timing, the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed. Any one of the two suggestive effects may be executable. That is, when it is determined in step 017AKS017 that the setting suggesting effect is to be executed, the second suggesting effect may be executed.
According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made until the specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion performance in which the suggestion is made even after the specific timing, the amusement of the game can be improved. can be done.

After executing the setting suggestion effect processing as described above, the control for ending the special effect is executed (step 017AKS015). After that, the flag during special effect is reset to OFF state (step 017AKS016), and the pre-reading notice setting process is finished.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect by such setting suggestion effect processing (step 017AKS017) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, if the set value is a set value that is disadvantageous to the player, the setting suggestion effect process may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming more discouraged due to the fact that the special effect is not executed even though the push button 31B has been operated, and further disadvantageous set values are suggested.

FIG. 10-4(A) is a flow chart showing the operation of the button effect setting process. The button effect setting process is executed within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. 7 when the variable display is started. The button effect setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the button effect during fluctuation and the back button effect and making settings for executing it.

In the button effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-4(A), the effect control CPU 120 first
By checking the received command buffer of the RAM 122, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received from the main substrate 11 (step 017AKS021). If the variation pattern designation command is not received (step 017AKS021; No), the button effect setting process is terminated.

If the variation pattern designation command is received (step 017AKS021; Yes)
, it is determined whether or not the button notice during fluctuation is executed (step 017AKS022). In step 017AKS022, it is determined whether or not the in-varying button notice is to be executed, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-4(B), when the display result is a big hit, it is determined that the mid-fluctuation button announcement is executed at a higher rate than when the display result is a loss. As a result, it is possible to foresee and suggest that a big win will occur depending on the presence or absence of the in-variation button forewarning.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the variable button notice is executed based only on whether the display result is a big hit or a loss. It may be determined whether or not the middle button advance notice is to be executed. Also, a plurality of effect patterns of the notice of the button during fluctuation may be provided, and the contents of the notice and the degree of reliability may be changed according to the effect patterns.

If it is determined at step 017AKS022 that the in-varying button announcement is to be executed (step 017AKS023; Yes), settings are made to execute the operation prompt effect in the in-varying button announcement (step 017AKS024). In step 017AKS024, for example, read out the effect control data for executing the operation promotion effect during the fluctuation,
The effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as use data during the current fluctuation. Also, an promotion effect flag indicating that the operation promotion effect is to be executed is set (step 017AKS025).

After executing the processing of step 017AKS025, or when it is determined in step 017AKS022 not to execute the notice during fluctuation (step 017AKS023; No
), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern for executing super reach (step 017AKS031). If the variation pattern does not execute super reach (step 017AKS031; No), the button effect setting process is terminated.

If it is a fluctuation pattern that executes super reach (step 017AKS031; Y
es), it is determined whether or not the back button effect is to be executed (step 017AKS032). At step 017AKS032, it is determined whether or not the back button effect is to be executed, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-4(C), when the display result is a big win, it is determined that the back button effect is executed at a higher rate than when the display result is a loss. As a result, it is possible to foresee and suggest that a big hit will occur depending on the presence or absence of the back button effect.

In this embodiment, whether or not the back button effect is executed is determined based only on whether the display result is a big hit or a loss, but the back button effect is determined based on the variation pattern (type of super reach, presence or absence of pseudo-run, etc.). It is also possible to determine whether or not the is executed. Also, a plurality of production patterns for back button production may be provided, and the contents of the notice and the degree of reliability may be varied according to the production pattern.

When it is determined at step 017AKS032 that the back button effect is not to be executed (step 017AKS033; No), the button effect setting process is terminated. Step 017AKS
If it is determined in 032 that the back button effect is to be executed (step 017AKS033;
Yes), the setting for executing the back button effect is performed (step 017AKS034).
At step 017AKS034, for example, the effect control data for executing the back button effect during super reach is read, and the effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as use data during the current fluctuation. Also, the back button effect flag indicating that the back button effect is to be executed is set (step 017AKS035), and the button effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing the operation of the button effect execution process. The button effect execution process is executed within the effect process during variable display in step S172 of FIG. 7 during variable display.
The button effect execution process is a process for executing a button effect or an effect in response to detection of an operation to the push button 31B during execution of the button effect determined in the button effect setting process of FIG. 10-4(A). is.

In the button effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the promotion effect flag is ON (step 017AKS041). If the promotion effect flag is ON (step 017AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the execution period of the operation promotion effect in the changing button notice has ended based on the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation (
step 017AKS042).

In the changing button notice, for example, the execution period of the operation promotion effect is the operation effective period. It should be noted that the execution period of the operation prompting effect and the operation valid period may not completely match.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the operation effective period of the in-variation button advance notice is longer than the look-ahead button advance notice and shorter than the back button effect. It is not limited to this, and the operation effective period of the notice of the button during fluctuation may be equal to or less than the notice of the prefetch button, or may be equal to or longer than the effect of the reverse button. In addition, the operation effective period may be changed according to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation during which the button notice during fluctuation is executed, or a plurality of production patterns of the button notice during fluctuation are provided so that the operation effective period differs depending on the production pattern. good too.

If the execution period of the operation prompting effect has not ended (step 017AKS042; No)
, by determining whether or not there is an operation signal from the push button 31B. When the pressing operation to the push button 31B is detected (step 017AKS043; Yes)
, executes control for operating the character (step 017AKS044). step 0
In 17AKS044, control for executing the second pattern special effect is executed based on the effect control data corresponding to the effect operation of the character when the operation is detected in the notice of the button during fluctuation.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1, 10-3(B), and 10-4(B), when the special effect is being executed, a second A case where one pattern of the special effect is executed, and a case where the second pattern of the special effect is executed based on the action of the player when the special effect is not executed. Expectations (jackpot reliability) to be controlled in an advantageous state are different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the special effect of the first pattern (special effect with character action) is determined to be executed at a rate of 60% at the time of the big hit, and 2% at the time of the loss. is determined to run at a rate of In addition, Figure 10-4 (
As shown in B), the special effect of the second pattern (fluctuation button notice) is 50% at the time of the big hit.
is determined to be executed at a rate of 20% at the time of loss. In this way, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the special effect of the first pattern is executed than the special effect of the second pattern. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively perform the action when the special performance is being executed.

When the execution period of the operation promotion effect (operation effective period) has ended (step 017AKS0
42; Yes), if the control for moving the character is executed in step 017AKS044, the control for ending the operation promotion effect is executed (step 017AKS045).
). After that, the promotion effect flag is reset to the OFF state (step 017AKS046).
.

If the promotion effect flag is in the off state (step 017AKS041; No), it is during the operation effective period of the variable button notice, and if the pressing operation to the push button 31B is not detected (step 017AKS043; No), or step After executing the processing of 017AKS046, it is determined whether or not the back button effect flag is ON (step 017AKS051). If the back button effect flag is off (step 017AK
S051; No), the button effect execution process is terminated.

If the back button effect flag is ON (step 017AKS051; Yes),
Based on the elapsed time from the start of the variation, etc., it is determined whether or not the valid operation period of the back button effect has ended (step 017AKS052). In this embodiment, the operation effective period of the back button effect is set longer than that of the other button effects. The operation valid period of the back button effect is, for example, a special period (for example, 30 seconds) from when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is started to before the effect of ready-to-win is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the operation valid period of the back button effect is longer than that of the pre-reading button notice. Specifically, the operation effective period of the back button effect is a special period (for example, 30 seconds), and the operation effective period of the pre-reading button notice is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, by shortening the operation effective period of the pre-reading button notice, it is possible to make the player aware that the operation (operation to the push button 31B) will be performed soon after the special performance (button vibration) is executed. In addition, by lengthening the operation valid period of the back button effect, the player can operate (operate the push button 31B) at the timing of his/her preference while concentrating on the ready-to-win effect during the ready-to-win effect. can be confirmed.

In addition, it is not limited to making the operation effective period of the back button effect longer than the pre-reading button notice, and the operation effective period of the back button effect may be shorter than the pre-reading button notice. may be the same.

If the operation effective period of the back button effect has not expired (step 017AKS052; N
o), it is determined whether or not a continuous hitting operation to the push button 31B has been detected (step 017).
AKS053). For example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 5
times) or more, it is determined that a continuous hitting operation on the push button 31B has been detected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the automatic repeated hitting function for the push button 31B is enabled in the back button effect, and when the push button 31B is held down for a specific period of time (for example, 2 seconds), the push button 31B is pushed thereafter. While it is left on, the push button 31
It is assumed that B is hit repeatedly. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in this embodiment, the automatic repeated hitting function is enabled only in the back button effect among the button effects, and the automatic repeated hitting function is disabled in the pre-reading button notice and the changing button notice. It's becoming This will
With the pre-reading button notice and the changing button notice, it is possible to make the player conscious of performing the action (operating the push button 31B). It should be noted that, in this embodiment, in the prefetch button notice and the changing button notice, special effects are not executed in response to repeated pressing operations. A special effect may be executed. In this case, by disabling the auto repeated hitting function in the pre-reading button notice and the changing button notice, it is possible to make the player aware that the push button 31B will be repeatedly hit.

It should be noted that the automatic repeated hitting function is not limited to being invalidated by the pre-reading button notice or the changing button notice, and the automatic repeated hitting function may be enabled or partially enabled by the pre-reading button notice or the changing button notice.

If the continuous hitting (or automatic continuous hitting) operation to the push button 31B is not detected (step 017AKS053; No), the button effect execution processing is terminated.

When continuous hitting (or automatic continuous hitting) operation to the push button 31B is detected (step 0
17AKS053; Yes), control to turn on the game effect lamp 9 at a predetermined position is executed (step 017AKS054). In step 017AKS054, a special effect (second
control for executing a special effect) is executed.

In this way, the special effect in the look-ahead button effect (the special effect that is executed in response to the action when the special effect is executed) clearly indicates the degree of advantage to the player by the action of the character. On the other hand, the special effect in the back button effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach, so it is a mode that does not interfere with the ready-to-win effect such as lighting of the lamp. is performed in a low mode. By doing so, in the back button effect, the special effect can be executed without interfering with the ready-to-win effect. In addition, in the look-ahead button effect, although the action (operation to the push button 31B) was performed when the special effect was executed, the special effect was executed in a mode with a low degree of recognition, and the interest decreased. You can prevent it from slipping.

In addition, the special effect in the back button effect is not limited to being executed in a mode that is less recognized by the player than the special effect in the prefetch button effect, and the special effect in the back button effect is not limited to the special effect in the prefetch button effect. It may be executed in a mode in which the degree of recognition by the player is higher than the special effect, or a similar special effect may be executed.

When the operation effective period of the back button effect has expired (step 017AKS052; Yes
), when the control for lighting the game effect lamp 9 at the predetermined position is executed in step 017AKS054, the back button effect flag is reset to the off state (step 017AKS
055), the button effect execution process is terminated.

Next, an effect operation example of the button effect of the characteristic portion 017AK will be described. FIG. 10-6 shows an example of the effect operation of the pre-reading button notice of the characteristic portion 017AK. Figure 10-6(A) shows
Each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5 of the image display device 5 is displayed by downward arrows.
In L, 5C, and 5R, it is shown that the decoration pattern is variably displayed.

At this time, the game ball enters the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port) to generate a starting winning,
Based on the starting prize, when it is determined at step 017AKS005 in FIG. 10-3 that the specific effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. be. At this time, the image display device 5 continues to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner, and does not issue a notification related to a special effect such as an operation promotion effect.

In step 017AKS005 of FIG. 10-3, if the push button 31B is pressed in the event that the performance pattern with character action is determined, step 017AK of FIG. 10-3
By executing the process of S014 and step 017AKS015, as shown in FIG. 10-6(D), and is positioned in front of the image display device 5 (on the side of the player). At this time, role 017AK0
In the display section 1, the character "Extremely hot!" is displayed to indicate the degree of expectation of the current starting prize (the degree of reliability of the jackpot of the variable display corresponding to the starting prize). After that, for example, the accessory 017AK01 returns to the storage position with the lapse of time, and the preview button notice (first pattern special effect) ends at least before the execution start timing of the variable button notice based on the same starting prize.

In this embodiment, the special effect of the first pattern is executed in which the characters "Gekiatsu!" are displayed on the display of the accessory 017AK01. A plurality of patterns may be included in one pattern of special performance. and,
Expectations may be varied according to patterns such as character types.

Further, in the case of executing the special effect of the first pattern, if the push button 31B is operated but does not work due to the malfunction of the accessory 017AK01, the special effect of the first pattern is being executed. In order to make it clear (that the conditions for executing the special effect of the first pattern are satisfied), the same notification sound and effect display as during the normal operation of the character 017AK01 are performed, and the special effect for the first pattern is executed. It may be developed into a super reach of

FIG. 10-7 shows an effect operation example of the in-varying button notice of the characteristic portion 017AK. Figure 1
0-7(A) indicates that decorative patterns are variably displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 by downward arrows. is shown. At the start of this variable display, if it is determined at step 017AKS022 in FIG.
-7(B), an operation prompting image 017AK0 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B
An operation prompting effect in which 2 is displayed is executed.

When the push button 31B is pressed within the operation valid period during execution of the operation prompting effect, FIG.
By executing the processing of steps 017AKS044 and 017AKS045 of 0-5, as shown in FIG. It moves from the storage position above the image display device 5 and is positioned in front of the image display device 5 (on the player's side) as shown in FIG. 10-7(D). At this time, the character "chance!" is displayed on the display part of the accessory 017AK01 to indicate the degree of expectation (reliability of the big win) of the display result of the current variation. Thereafter, for example, the accessory 017AK01 returns to the storage position due to the lapse of time, and the in-varying button notice ends.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the changing button notice is executed by displaying the characters "Chance!" on the display of the accessory 017AK01.
There may be a plurality of patterns in the notice of the button during fluctuation. Then, the degree of expectation may be varied according to patterns such as the types of characters.

In the in-varying button announcement, an operation prompting effect as shown in FIG. 10-7(B) is executed.
During the execution of the special effect in the pre-reading button notice, the operation promotion effect is not executed. By doing so, a special effect may be executed in accordance with the player's action (operation of the push button 31B) even though the operation promotion effect is not being executed.
Unexpectedness can be given to the player, and interest is improved.

FIG. 10-8 shows an effect operation example of the back button effect of the characteristic portion 017AK. Figure 10-
In 8(A), the decorative pattern with the number "7" stops in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, and the downward arrow moves to the "middle" decorative pattern display area. At 5L, the decoration pattern is variably displayed to indicate that it is ready. Also, FIG.
-8 (B) indicates that the reach performance of super reach has been started after developing into super reach. During the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win, for example, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced in the lower right area of the image display device 5 and executed.

At the start of this variable display, if it is determined at step 017AKS032 in FIG. ), the push button 31B is held down for a long time and it is determined that the operation has been repeated for a predetermined time, step 017AKS054 in FIG. 10-5.
By executing the process of , as shown in FIG. 10-8(D), a special effect is executed in which the game effect lamp 9 at a predetermined position lights up. The game effect lamp 9 at the predetermined position may be extinguished after the elapse of time or the like.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 018AK)
Feature 017AK includes feature 018AK. In the characteristic part 018AK, the effect executed based on the action of the player (operation to the operating means, etc.) when the operation promoting effect is not executed is the special effect. And when the special effect (button vibe) is being executed,
A special effect (effect of moving a character) that is executed according to the operation of the push button 31B is the first special effect of the characteristic part 018AK. In addition, in the back button effect, when the special effect is not being executed, the special effect (effect of turning on the lamp) executed in response to the operation of the push button 31B is the second special effect of the characteristic portion 018AK. . and feature 0
In 18AK, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs between when the first special effect is executed and when the second special effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player have an element of intervening in the game to improve interest, and to draw the player's attention to the presence or absence of the special effect. Also, in this embodiment, the first special effect accompanied by a special effect (special effect in the pre-reading button notice)
The degree of expectation for a big hit when executed is higher than the second special effect (special effect in the back button effect) that does not accompany the special effect. As a result, the player can be motivated to actively perform the action when the special performance is being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-1, 10-3 (B), and 10-4 (C), when the special effect is being executed, based on the action of the player a case where a first special effect is executed, which is executed when the special effect is not executed; The expectations (jackpot reliability) that are controlled in an advantageous state are different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the special effect of the first pattern (special effect with character action) is determined to be executed at a rate of 60% at the time of the big hit, and at a rate of 2% at the time of the loss. is determined to run at a rate of In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-4(C), the second pattern special effect (fluctuation button notice) is determined to be executed at a rate of 60% at the time of the big hit, and at a rate of 15% at the time of loss. be done. In this way, the reliability of the big win when the first special effect is executed is higher than that of the second special effect.
As a result, the player can be motivated to actively perform the action when the special performance is being executed.

It should be noted that the special effect of the characteristic portion 018AK and the effect that is executed based on the player's action (operation to the operating means, etc.) when the operation promoting effect is not executed is the special effect, but the operation promoting effect is executed. "Not being performed" is not limited to the fact that the operation prompting effect is not being executed at all.
In the characteristic part 018AK, the fact that the operation promotion effect is not being executed means that another operation promotion effect (
For example, some production modes of the operation promotion effect are not executed compared to the operation promotion effect of the button notice during fluctuation), and the operation promotion effect is executed by some effect devices compared to other operation promotion effects. This includes restrictions on the operation promotion effect, such as the fact that the operation promotion effect is not performed, the effect period is shorter than other operation promotion effects, and the like.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 017AK (018AK))
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate. For example, a specific effect (advantage suggesting effect, setting suggesting effect) related to the characteristic portion 66AK may be executed. Also, the means of the characteristic portion 66AK may be employed in the characteristic portion 017AK (018AK).

In the above embodiment, the special effect of the first pattern with special effect (special effect in advance button notice) is better than the special effect of pattern 2 (special effect in fluctuation button notice) without special effect , When it was executed, the expectation of the jackpot was high. Conversely,
The second pattern of special effects without special effects may have a higher expectation for big hits when executed than the first pattern of special effects with special effects. As a result, even when the special performance is not executed, the player can have expectations for the execution of the highly anticipated special performance.

In the above embodiment, when the first special effect with special effect (special effect in pre-reading button notice) is executed rather than the second special effect without special effect (special effect in back button effect) Expectations for the jackpot were high. Conversely, the second special performance without special performance may have a higher expectation for a big hit when executed than the first special performance with special performance. As a result, even when the special performance is not executed, the player can have expectations for the execution of the highly anticipated special performance.

A lamp may be provided on the push button 31B so that it can be turned on. Then, the push button 31B may be lit as a special effect or an operation promotion effect. For example, as special effects, a special effect of lighting the push button 31B, a special effect of vibrating the push button 31B, and a special effect of lighting and vibrating the push button 31B may be executable. And depending on the type of special production, there are various expectations (expectation for a big hit,
The degree of expectation that the special effect will be executed after that, etc.) may be made different. In addition, multiple types of production patterns with different production periods for button vibrations and lamp lighting are provided, and various expectations (expectation for big hits, expectations for special effects after that, etc.) are set according to the production period. It can be different.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the action of the player (operation of the push button 31B) is detected during the special effect (button vibration), the special effect is terminated. The special performance may be continued even after detection, and various expectations (expectation for a big hit, expectation for execution of the special performance, etc.) may differ according to the performance period of the special performance. . By doing so, the effect period of the special effect and the detection means (push button 31B)
can draw more attention.

In addition, the special effect is a notice /
The effect is not limited to vibrating or lighting the detection means capable of detecting the action of the player, as long as it is a suggestive advance notice effect. Even in this case, it is preferable that the special effect be an effect that makes the player aware of the action or an effect that makes the detection means for detecting the action interesting.

In the above embodiment, it is assumed that the operation-promoting effect that actively prompts the user to operate the push button 31B is not executed during the special effect. good. For example, when the push button 31B is not operated even once while the special performance is executed a predetermined number of times, the operation of the push button 31B is urged during the special performance when the operation frequency of the push button 31B is low. An operation prompting presentation may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from not being suggested without executing the first pattern special effect (first special effect) at all.

Hidden feature part 17AK, such as the effect (special effect of the first pattern in which the character moves) is executed when the push button 31B is operated during button vibration (during special effect), and the back button effect during super reach. Elements may be explained on a demo screen or the like.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, during the ready-to-reach production of super reach, the execution of the special production is restricted, but regardless of the ready-to-reach production of super reach or other production situations, special A production may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the special effect of the first pattern (first special effect) that is executed based on the special effect or the action of the special effect is a mode that does not interfere with other effects.

In the back button effect during super reach, different effects may be executed according to the number of times the push button 31B is operated (number of repeated hits). For example, in the back button effect, the lighting color of the lamp changes step by step according to the number of times the push button 31B is operated (
Step up) may suggest the degree of advantage. For example, the lighting color of the lamp may change from white to blue to green to red according to the degree of advantage and the number of consecutive hits. By doing so, it is possible to prompt the user to press the push button 31B repeatedly or for a long time (automatic repeated hitting). In the back button effect, the operation of the push button 31B may be disabled at the end of the super reach. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the reach effect of the super reach. Also, such a push button 31
During the period in which the operation to B is disabled, the execution of other button effects (forecast button announcement or changing button announcement) may be prohibited.

The special effect of the first pattern and the special effect of the second pattern in the above embodiment are shown in FIG. 10-6 (D
), and as shown in FIG. 10-7(D), both are effects for moving the character 017AK01, and the characters displayed on the display portion of the character 017AK01 are different. It is not limited to this, and the special effects of the first pattern and the special effects of the second pattern may be completely different effects. For example, the special effect of the first pattern is executed as part of the pre-reading button notice,
Since it is an effect that is executed before the variable display of the notice target, in order not to interfere with other effects in the variable display or to make the variable display more expected than necessary, a modest effect with a low degree of recognition by the player It can also be used as a performance. On the other hand, the special effect of the second pattern is executed as a part of the variable button notice, and is an effect executed in the variable display of the notice target. A flashy performance with a high degree of recognition by

Further, as the notice effect during fluctuation, the notice effect of vibrating (or lighting) the push button 31B may be executable. In this advance notice effect, even if the push button 31B is operated, the special effect may not be executed. By doing so, a pseudo special effect can be executed, and the player can expect that the special effect will be executed in accordance with the player's action.

As a pre-reading button notice, when a special effect (button vibrate or button lighting) is being executed, the character works according to the player's action (operation to the push button 31B), and further during the action of the character. Different effects may be executed according to the player's actions (operations on the push button 31B). Various expectations (expectation for a big hit, expectation for execution of a special effect afterward, etc.) may be different between such a prefetch button notice and the prefetch button notice of the above embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the second special effect is the effect of lighting the game effect lamp 9 at a predetermined position, but it may be the effect of outputting a special sound or other effects displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, The reach effect) may be different in the effect mode (color of characters and characters).

(Description of means related to characteristic part 017AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 017AK is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 017AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the game medium is the start area (For example, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening) based on the passing, the holding display means (step 017AKS002
and an expectation control CPU 120 that controls the advantageous state in response to the passage of the game medium based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area by a production mode different from the holding display. special effect executing means (step 017AK
S005, effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 017AKS007),
A special effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of steps 017AKS014, step 017AKS044, and step 017AKS054) capable of executing a special effect based on the action of the player, and the special effect is A first pattern (for example, FIG. 10-6) executed based on the action of the player when the special effect is being executed, and a pattern when the special effect is not being executed. There is a second pattern (for example, FIG. 10-7) that is executed based on the action performed, and a case where the special effect of the first pattern is executed, and a case where the special effect of the second pattern is executed. is executed, and the expected degree of control to the advantageous state is different (for example, FIG. 10-1, FIG. 10-3 (B)
, FIG. 10-4(B)).

According to such a configuration, the special effect can be executed based on the action of the player, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on whether or not the special effect is being executed. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special performance is executed, the interest is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the special effect executing means changes the mode of a detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player as the special effect. good too.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the detection means, and to encourage the player's action.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above, when an action promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) is being executed to promote the action of the player, the detection means detects the action of the player. Based on this, announcement effect execution means (step 017AKS022, step 017A
KS024, step 017 AKS044 processing for effect control CPU 120) is provided, and when the special effect is executed and the special effect of the first pattern can be executed based on the player's action, The motion promotion effect may not be executed.

According to such a configuration, the special effect may be executed even though the action promotion effect is not executed, so that an unexpected effect can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, during execution of a predetermined effect, the execution of the special effect of the first pattern is restricted (for example, Yes in step 017AKS004).
In the case of s, the pre-reading notice setting process may be ended).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent other effects from being hindered by the special effects.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above, when the special effect is not executed in spite of the player performing an action while the special effect is being executed. ,
It is also possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests which of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player is set (for example, the process of step 017AKS017 is executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce disappointment when the special effect is not executed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, the special effect executing means
The special effect of the first pattern can be executed based on the passage of the game medium through the start area, and when the variable display corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the start area is executed, the first pattern is executed. Two patterns of the special effect can be executed, and the special effect of the first pattern ends before the timing when the special effect of the second pattern based on the same passage is executed (for example, FIG. 10- 2) You may do so.

According to such a configuration, after the special effect of the first pattern is executed, the special effect of the second pattern based on the same passage can be executed, so it is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 018AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 018AK is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 018AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the game medium is the start area (For example, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening) based on the passing, the holding display means (step 017AKS002
and an expectation control CPU 120 that controls the advantageous state in response to the passage of the game medium based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area by a production mode different from the holding display. special effect executing means (step 017AK
S005, effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 017AKS007),
Action promoting effect execution means (effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 017AKS024) capable of executing an action promoting effect (for example, an operation promoting effect) that promotes the action of the player;
A notice effect executing means (an effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 017AKS044) capable of executing a notice effect based on the action of the player when the action promotion effect is being executed, and the action special effect executing means (steps 017AKS014,
and a production control CPU 120) that executes the processing of step 017 AKS054, and as the special production, a first special that is executed based on the action of the player when the special production is being executed. Effect (for example, FIG. 10-6) and a second special effect (for example, FIG. 1
0-8), and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs between when the first special effect is executed and when the second special effect is executed (for example, FIG. 10- 1, Figure 10-
3(B), FIG. 10-4(C)).

According to such a configuration, the special effect can be executed based on the action of the player, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on whether or not the special effect is being executed. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special performance is executed, the interest is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the first special effect is executed in a manner with a higher player recognition degree than the second special effect (for example, FIGS. 10-6 and 10 -8) You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a low degree of recognition of the first special effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the period during which the player can detect the action is shorter in the first special effect than in the second special effect (for example, FIG. 10-1). You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player's action when the first special effect is executed.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3) includes detection means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player, and the special effect execution means causes the game to be played by the detection means. The special effect can be executed based on the detection of the motion of the player, and the detection means detects the continuous motion of the player when the continuous motion of the player is detected for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to detect continuous motions that are considered to have been performed (for example, automatic repeated hitting function) (eg, step 017AKS053), and the special effect execution means detects the second special effect based on the detection of the continuous motion of the player. is executed, the second special effect can be executed based on the detection of deemed continuous motion, and the first special effect may not be executed based on the detection of deemed continuous motion.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player's action when the first special effect is executed.

(5) A setting that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player in the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (4) above. Means (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A), and a production execution means (
For example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.), and the effect execution means makes a suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then executes after the specific timing. Possible effects include a first suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed, and a second suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the setting of the setting means is suggested. , can be executed (for example, FIGS. 9-12).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve amusement in the game by enabling execution of either the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect after the specific timing.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 017AK and the characteristic portion 018AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic portions.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 15SH)
Next, the characterizing portion 15SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 15SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, as described above.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 15SH includes detection means capable of detecting the action of the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a stick controller 31A capable of detecting a player's tilting operation and a push button 31B capable of detecting a player's pressing operation.

The gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 15SH can suggest an effective period in which the detection of the player's motion is effective, and can execute a promotion effect for prompting the player to perform the motion. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that displays a valid period bar display that informs the operation effective period during which detection of the player's operation is valid, and an operation prompt display that prompts the player to operate. . Details will be described later.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 15SH includes specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the action of the player is detected within the valid period. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a cut-in effect when the player's operation is detected within the operation valid period. Details will be described later.

The promotion effect execution means related to the characteristic part 15SH starts the effect suggesting the first effective period and terminates the effect when the action of the player is not detected within the first effective period. is executable. For example, a valid period bar display indicating the valid period of the first operation is displayed, and when the player's operation is not detected within the valid period of the first operation, the valid period bar display is erased. It is possible to perform a production. Details will be described later.

The promotion effect execution means related to the characteristic part 15SH starts the effect suggesting the first effective period, and starts the effect suggesting the second effective period when the action of the player is not detected within the first effective period. However, it is possible to execute the promotion effect of the second pattern in which the effect is terminated when the action of the player is not detected within the second effective period. For example, displaying a valid period bar indicating a first operation valid period, and displaying a valid period bar indicating a second operation valid period when the player's operation is not detected within the first operation valid period, When the player's operation is not detected within the second operation valid period, it is possible to execute an operation promoting effect of "press x 2" to erase the valid period bar display. Details will be described later.

In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 15SH, the degree of expectation for control to be in an advantageous state is higher when the second pattern promotion effect is executed than when the first pattern promotion effect is executed. For example, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the "press x 2" operation promotion effect is executed than when the "press x 1" operation promotion effect is executed. Details will be described later.

The specific effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 15SH is configured to detect the action of the player within the first effective period of the promotion effect of the first pattern, and to detect the action of the player within the first effective period of the promotion effect of the second pattern. A common specific effect can be executed when the action of is detected. for example,
When the player's operation is detected within the first operation valid period in the "press x 1" operation promotion presentation, and when the player's operation is detected within the first operation valid period in the "press x 2" operation promotion presentation. When it is detected, it is possible to execute a cut-in effect of "golden background". Details will be described later.

The specific effect executing means related to the characteristic portion 15SH is configured to detect the action of the player within the first effective period of the promotion effect of the second pattern, and to detect the action of the player within the second effective period of the promotion effect of the second pattern. A common specific effect can be executed when the action of is detected. for example,
When the player's operation is detected within the first operation valid period in the "press x 2" operation promotion presentation, and when the player's operation is detected within the second operation valid period in the "press x 2" operation promotion presentation. When it is detected, it is possible to execute a cut-in effect of "golden background". Details will be described later.

The first valid period and the second valid period related to the characteristic portion 15SH have different lengths. For example, the length of the second operation valid period is shorter than the length of the first operation valid period. Details will be described later.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 15SH includes multiple types of detection means. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a stick controller 31A and push buttons 31B as described above.

The promotion effect execution means related to the characteristic portion 15SH suggests the type of detection means capable of detecting the action of the player during the effective period. For example, as an operation prompting display, the stick controller 3
A controller image imitating 1A or a button image imitating push button 31B is displayed. Details will be described later.

In the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 15SH, the detection means indicated in the first effective period and the detection means indicated in the second effective period are of the same type. For example, a button image is displayed as an operation promotion display in the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period. Details will be described later.

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 15SH, the detecting means indicated in the first effective period and the detecting means indicated in the second effective period are of different types. For example, a button image is displayed as an operation prompting display during the first operation valid period, and a controller image is displayed as an operation prompting display during the second operation valid period. Details will be described later.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11A is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a final decoration symbol as a display result of the decoration symbol (step 15SHS1). As the process of step 15SHS1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern and the display result indicated by the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.
As an example, variable display contents according to the combination of variation patterns and display results include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". Just do it.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stopped, and the display result is "
Lost.” When the variable display content is ``ready (losing)'', after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the decided decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result is ``losing''. When the variable display content is "unprobability variable (big win)", the display result becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state ends becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the display result is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big win game state is the probability variation state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the effect control CPU 120
Different decorative patterns are determined as final stop patterns in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determination of the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, etc., and uses a determined left symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to it, the left confirmed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. In this way, the right finalized decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the finalized decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decoration symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random counter or the like is extracted, and the medium-definite pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. etc., the image display device 5
A middle fixed decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C on the screen is determined.

When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", the effect control CPU 120 determines the same decorative design in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random number values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, etc., and uses a determined left and right symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to, among the confirmed decorative patterns, the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5
A decoration pattern having the same pattern number, which is stop-displayed in line with the pattern number, is determined. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and a medium-definite pattern determination table that is stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 are determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns result in a big winning combination, any By adding or subtracting the value to or from the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern, the fixed decorative patterns are not a big win combination but a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-determined decoration pattern, the difference between the pattern numbers of the left-determined decoration pattern and the right-determined decoration pattern may be determined, and the middle-determined decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 displays the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. , the same decoration pattern is determined as the final stop pattern. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit determined symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 124, a random counter for effect, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to a jackpot fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and the like, "left", "middle", and "left" on the screen of the image display device 5.
The decoration symbols having the same symbol number and stopped and displayed together in the "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)" or whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, the normal pattern and the probability variation pattern It is only necessary to determine which one is to be the fixed decorative pattern. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols that reminds of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the variable probability state is displayed during the big win game state or after the end of the big win game state. It is a production that informs whether or not it will be.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, if the variable display content is "
When it is decided to execute a promotion performance during a big hit even if it is "probability variable (big win)", a fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In addition, in the process of step 15SHS1, the variable display content is "non-probable variation (big hit)" or "
In the case of "variable probability (big hit)", it may be determined whether or not to execute a variable probability promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, so that the control to the variable probability state is made difficult, By variably displaying the decorative patterns again and stopping and displaying the decorative patterns of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same decorative patterns, the player can be recognizably informed that the probability variable state is controlled. In some cases, the control to the variable probability state is not notified by stop-displaying the decorative symbols of the non-probability variable big hit combination after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production. When it is determined in the processing of step 15SHS1 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After the processing of step 15SHS1, the effect control CPU 120 executes a ready-to-win effect setting process for setting the execution of the ready-to-win effect (step 14SHS2). In the ready-to-win effect setting process, execution setting of the ready-to-win effect is performed.

Specifically, in the ready-to-win effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach", which does not become the ready-to-win mode, based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect control command. In the case of "non-reach", the reach effect setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is other than "non-reach", the reach effect setting process is terminated after setting the reach effect according to the variation pattern.

In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display. As ready-to-win effects, normal ready-to-win, super ready-to-win A, and super ready-to-win B are prepared, each of which has a different effect mode. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is high in the order of super reach B>super reach A>normal reach.

After the processing of step 15SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect setting process for setting the execution of the cut-in effect (step 15SHS3). Here, the cut-in effect is a effect for foretelling the reliability of the big hit, and is a effect for inserting a cut image irrelevant to the previous flow in the middle of another foretelling effect or ready-to-win effect. The cut-in effect is executed when the player's operation is detected within the valid period during which the detection of the player's operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid. There are three types of cut-in effects, ie, "green background", "red background", and "gold background".

The “green background” cut-in effect is a effect of inserting a cut image with a “green” background color.
The “red background” cut-in rendering is a rendering of inserting a cut image with a “red” background color. "
The "gold background" cut-in rendering is a rendering of inserting a cut image with a "gold" background color.

(Cut-in effect setting processing)
FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the cut-in effect setting process executed in step 15SHS3 of FIG. 11-1. In the cut-in effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is super reach B based on the variation pattern indicated in the effect control command from the main board 11. (Step 1
5SHS11).

In step 15SHS11, if the variation pattern is super reach B (step 1
5SHS11; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a cut-in effect (step 15SHS12). Specifically, in the process of step 15SHS11, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number for determining the cut-in effect, and stores the extracted numerical data and the table for determining the cut-in effect shown in FIG. is used to determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect.

As shown in Figure 11-3, in the case of the variation pattern of Super Reach B (losing), "no execution" is 60%, "with execution" and "green background pattern PTA-1" is determined at a rate of 20%. "Red background pattern PTA-2" is determined at a rate of 15% with "execution", and "gold background pattern PTA-3" is determined at a rate of 5% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern of Super Reach B (jackpot), "no execution" is determined at a rate of 5%, "with execution" and "green background pattern PTA-1" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "execution "Yes" determines "red background pattern PTA-2" at a rate of 10%, and "with execution" determines "gold background pattern PTA-3".
” is determined at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, in the case of a big hit, the cut-in performance is more likely to be executed than in the case of a loss, and the player can have a sense of anticipation for the big win in the cut-in performance, improving the amusement of the game. do.

In addition, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach B (big hit), it is easier to execute the cut-in effect of "gold background pattern PTA-3" than in the case of the variation pattern of super reach B (losing). The cut-in effect of "golden background" can give a sense of anticipation of a big hit, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, in the case of super reach B (big hit), the cut-in effect of "green background pattern PTA-1" and the cut-in effect of "red background pattern PTA-2" are executed, so the "green background" cut With regard to the in-effect and the cut-in effect of the "red background", the player can have a sense of anticipation of a big hit, and the amusement of the game is improved.

The cut-in effect can be executed in the case of the variation pattern of super reach B, but is not limited to this, and can be executed in the variation pattern of super reach A and the variation pattern of super reach with pseudo continuous variation. good too. For example, the determination ratio may be such that the greater the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the higher the reliability of the big hit. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether the game is a big hit or not and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

After the processing of step 15SHS12, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cut-in effect is "
Execution" (step 15SHS13).

If the cut-in effect is "executed" at step 15SHS13 (step 15
SHS13; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the type of cut-in effect pattern determined in step 15SHS12 (step 15SHS14). That is, in step 15SHS14, "green background pattern PTA-1", "red background pattern PTA-1"
-2” and “golden background pattern”.

If it is not the variation pattern of super reach B at step 15SHS11 (step 15SHS11; No), or if the cut-in effect is not "executed" at step 15SHS13 (step 15SHS13; No), after the processing of step 15SHS14, End the cut-in effect setting process.

Returning to FIG. 11-1, after the processing of step 15SHS2, the effect control CPU 120
An operation promotion effect setting process for setting the execution of the operation promotion effect is executed (step 15SHS4
). Here, the operation prompting effect is an effect that suggests an operation valid period in which the detection of the player's operation is effective and prompts the player to perform an operation.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 suggests an operation effective period in which detection of the player's operation is effective by displaying an operation prompting display, an operation explanation display, and an effective period bar display in the operation effective period, and the game It is possible to execute an operation prompting presentation for prompting the user to operate.

The operation prompting display is provided to the player by pressing the stick controller 31A or the push button 3.
This is a display for prompting the operation of 1B, and in this embodiment, the stick controller 31
A controller image imitating A or a button image imitating the push button 31B. Note that the button image is not limited to the image imitating the push button 31B, and the push button 3
Any image that can identify 1B may be used, and simple display, schematic display, decorative display, outline display, or the like may be used. Similarly, the controller image is the stick controller 3
The image is not limited to an image simulating 1A, and any image that can identify the stick controller 31A may be used, such as a simple display, a schematic display, a decorative display, an outline display, or the like.

The operation explanation display is provided to the player by using the stick controller 31A or the push button 3
This is a display for notifying the user of the operation content of 1B, and in this embodiment, it is an operation explanation image in which the operation content of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is written in characters or the like. Along with the operation explanation image, the operation explanation sound, which is the audio output of the content, is output from the speaker 8.
It is also possible to repeatedly or singly output from the L and 8R, or to repeatedly or singly output the action explanation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in place of the action explanation image.

The valid period bar display is a display for notifying the player of the valid period of operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In this embodiment, the remaining valid period is sequentially displayed with respect to the entire valid period. It is used as a possible operation effective period display image. The validity period bar display includes a first bar display area showing the remaining validity period with respect to the total validity period and a second bar display area showing the elapsed period. For example, the first bar display area is displayed in a bright color, the second bar display area is displayed in a dark color, and as time passes during the effective operation period, the ratio of the first bar display area to the total area of the bar display decreases. and the second
The percentage of bar display area is increased. It should be noted that the effective period display is not limited to the bar display format, and various formats such as a countdown display format, a countup display format, and the like may be used.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG.
”, “Tilt×1”, and “Push×2” can be executed.

The "press x 1" operation prompting effect is an effect that validates the pressing operation of the push button 31B during the first operation valid period and prompts the player to press the push button 31B during the first operation valid period. In the "press x 1" operation prompting effect, when the first operation effective period starts, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the effective period bar display is started. Then press "Press x
1”, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation valid period, or when the first operation valid period ends without the pressing operation of the push button 31B being detected, the operation is performed. Terminate the display of the prompt display, operation description display, and valid period bar display. For example, in the operation prompting effect of "press x 1", a button image imitating the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting display. In addition, in the "Press x 1" operation prompting effect, an action explanation image with characters "Press!" is displayed as an action explanation display.

The “tilt x 1” operation promotion effect is the stick controller 3 during the first operation effective period.
This is an effect in which the tilting operation of 1A is validated and the player is prompted to perform the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A during the first operation valid period. In the "tilt x 1" operation prompting effect, when the first operation valid period starts, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the valid period bar display is started.
In the "tilt x 1" operation prompting effect, when the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A is detected within the first operation effective period, or when the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A is not detected and the first operation effective period ends. When finished, terminate the display of the operation prompt display, operation instruction display, and validity period bar display. For example, in the "tilt x 1" operation prompting effect, a controller image imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting display. In addition, in the "tilting x 1" operation prompting effect, an action explanation image with the characters "Close!" is displayed as an action explanation display.

The "press x 2" operation prompting effect validates the pressing operation of the push button 31B during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period. This is an effect capable of prompting the user to press the push button 31B. "Press x 2
, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the effective period bar display is started when the first operation valid period starts. Then, in the operation promotion effect of "pressing x 2", the first
When the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when the first operation valid period ends without the pressing operation of the push button 31B being detected, the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the valid period bar are displayed. Finish viewing the display. Then, when the first operation valid period ends without the pressing operation of the push button 31B being detected, the operation prompting display and operation explanation are displayed at the start of the second operation valid period in the "press x 2" operation prompting effect. Start showing the display and lifetime bar display. In the operation prompting rendering of "press x 2", when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the second operation effective period, or when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the second operation effective period ends. When finished, terminate the prompt display, action description display, and validity period bar display. For example, in the operation prompting effect of "press x 2", a button image imitating the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting display. In addition, in the "press x 2" operation prompting effect, as an operation explanation display, during the first operation valid period, an operation explanation image with the words "Press!"I'll give you a chance!" is displayed. Here, in the "press x 2" operation prompting effect, if an operation explanation image with the text "Press!" is displayed during the first valid period, the text "Press!" Even if the operation explanation image indicating is not displayed, the push button 31B can be operated by displaying the operation explanation image indicating the words "I'll give you another chance!" It can be recognized that it is notified to press. In this way, the operation explanation display is not limited to a mode in which the details of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push buttons 31B are clearly notified to the player, but the details of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push buttons 31B are not only hidden to the player. It is good also as a mode to inform to.

(Operation Promoting Effect Setting Processing)
FIG. 11-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation promotion effect setting process executed in step 15SHS4 of FIG. 11-1. In the operation promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-4, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cut-in effect is "executed" (step 15SHS21).

If the cut-in effect is "executed" at step 15SHS21 (step 15
SHS21; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of operation promotion effect (step 15SHS22). Specifically, in the process of step 15SHS22, the effect control C
The PU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the operation promotion effect, and determines the type of the operation promotion effect using the extracted numerical data and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-5(A). do.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), when executing the cut-in effect of "green background" at the time of the fluctuation pattern of super reach B (losing), "press × 1 pattern PTB-11" is 1
00%. Also, when executing the cut-in effect of "red background" at the time of the fluctuation pattern of super reach B (losing), "press x 1 pattern PTB-11" is 6
It is determined at a rate of 0%, and "tilt x 1 pattern PTB-12" is determined at a rate of 40%. Also, when executing the cut-in effect of "golden background" at the time of the variation pattern of super reach B (losing), "press × 1 pattern PTB-11" is determined at a rate of 50%, "
"Tilt x 1 pattern PTB-12" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "Press x 2 pattern PTB
-21” is determined at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the "green background" cut-in effect is executed in the super reach B (big hit) variation pattern, the "press x 1 pattern PTB-11" is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, when the cut-in effect of "red background" is executed at the time of the variation pattern of super reach B (big hit), "press x 1 pattern PTB-11" is determined at a rate of 40%, "tilt x 1 Pattern PTB-12" is 60%
determined by the ratio of In addition, when the cut-in effect of "gold background" is executed at the time of the variation pattern of super reach B (jackpot), "press x 1 pattern PTB-11" is determined at a rate of 20%, "tilt x 1 Pattern PTB-12" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "Press x 2 pattern PTB-21" is determined at a rate of 50%.

According to such a configuration, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach B (big hit), the "press × 1 pattern PTB-11
, the operation promoting effect of ``pressing x 2 pattern PTB-21'' is easier to execute than the operation promoting effect of ``pressing x 2 pattern PTB-21''. increase interest in More specifically, when an operation promoting effect prompting a pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed during the first operation valid period, the player can confirm that the operation promoting effect is the operation promoting effect of "Press x 1 pattern PTB-11". or "Press × 2 pattern PTB-21
”, or it is difficult or impossible to identify. Temporarily, "Press x 2 patterns PT
B-21", the push button 31B during the first operation effective period.
If the pressing operation is not performed, the display such as the operation prompting display should be started in the subsequent second operation valid period. However, in the case of the operation prompting effect of "Press x 1 pattern PTB-11", if the push button 31B is not pressed during the first operation valid period, the operation prompting display, etc. will be displayed during the second operation valid period after that. The display will not start, and the cut-in effect will not be executed. Therefore, in the first operation effective period, when the operation prompting effect to prompt the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed, the cut-in effect may not be executed unless the push button 31B is pressed. At the same time, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the push button 31B is not pressed, and to enhance the interest associated with the operation-promoting effect.

In addition, in the case of the variation pattern of super reach B (big hit), compared to the operation promotion effect of "press x 1 pattern PTB-11", compared to the variation pattern of super reach B (loss), "tilt x 1 pattern PTB-12" operation promotion effect is easier to execute,
A sense of anticipation for a big hit can be expected for the operation promoting performance of "Devotion x 1", and the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, even in the case of super reach B (big win), since the operation promotion performance of ``pressing x 1 pattern PTB-11'' is executed, the expectation of a big win is also expected for the operation promoting performance of ``pressing x 1''. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the cut-in effect of "gold background" is executed, the operation of "press × 2 pattern PTB-21" is more likely than when the cut-in effect of "green background" or "red background" is executed. Acceleration performance is easily executed, and when an operation is performed in the second operation effective period, the player can have a feeling of anticipation that the cut-in performance of ``golden background'' will be executed, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, when the cut-in effect of "golden background" is executed, "press x 1 pattern PTB
-11” and the operation promotion effect of “tilt × 1 pattern PTB-12” can be executed, so even when the operation is performed during the first operation valid period, the “golden background” cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation to be played, and the amusement of the game is improved.

According to such a configuration, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the first operation effective period of the "pressing x 1" operation promoting presentation, and when the "pressing x 2" operation promoting presentation is detected, When the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid period of one operation, it is possible to execute the cut-in effect of the common “golden background”. Therefore, even if the "golden background" cut-in effect is executed when the push button 31B is pressed during the first operation valid period, "
Since it is not possible to specify which of the "press x 1" operation prompting effect and the "press x 2" operation prompt effect has been executed, the pressing operation of the push button 31B is intentionally performed during the first operation effective period. However, it is possible to raise the awareness of the fact that it is clear which operation prompting effect it is.

Also, only when the cut-in effect of "golden background" is executed, "press x 2 pattern PT
B-21" operation prompting effect can be executed. Therefore, when the operation prompting effect "Press x 2" is executed, the push button 31B is pressed during either the first operation valid period or the second operation valid period. is performed, the cut-in effect of "golden background" is executed.

According to such a configuration, when the operation promoting effect prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed in the first operation effective period,
It is possible to give an opportunity to execute the cut-in effect of "golden background" again, and to enhance the interest accompanying the operation promoting effect.

Returning to FIG. 11-1, after the processing of step 15SHS2, the effect control CPU 120
One of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 15S
HS5). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns corresponding to a variation pattern or the like specified by the effect control command, and sets it as a usage pattern.

Following the processing of step 15SHS5, for example, the production control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the production control command (step 15SHS6).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the variable display of decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 15SHS7). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined in step 15SHS5 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image display device 5 "Left", "Center", and "Right" decoration pattern display areas 5 provided in the display area
It suffices to start the variable display of decorative patterns at L, 5C, and 5R.

After executing the process of step 15SHS7, the effect control CPU 120, in response to the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern, displays a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. Settings are made for updating the pending display, etc. (step 15SHS8).

After updating the pending display etc. by the processing of step 15SHS8, the effect control CPU 120
After updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 15SHS8), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Timing of operation promotion effect and cut-in effect)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of the "pressing down x 1" or "tilting x 1" operation prompting effect and the cut-in effect. In the following description, the timing of the "press x 1" operation prompting effect and the cut-in effect will be described. The timing of the operation promoting effect and the cut-in effect of "tilting x 1" is the same as the timing of the operation promoting effect and the cut-in effect of "pressing down x 1", so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this embodiment, in the effect control pattern, the period from timing T1 to timing T2 in the reach effect period of super reach is set as the first operation valid period during which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is valid.

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and (B), when the first operation valid period starts at timing T1 while the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed, the effect control CPU 120
The progress of the ready-to-reach performance of super reach is interrupted and the operation promotion performance is started. At this time, display of an operation prompting display, an operation explanation display, and a valid period bar display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the first operation valid period ends at timing T2, the effect control CPU 120 ends the operation promotion effect. Resume progress of the Reach effect of Super Reach. At this time, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the effective period bar display ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation effective period (timing TS), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the operation promotion effect. Start the cut-in production. At this time, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the effective period bar display ends. Then, at timing T5 set in the effect control pattern as the end timing of the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 120 ends the cut-in effect and restarts the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of the "press x 2" operation promotion effect and cut-in effect.

In this embodiment, in the production control pattern, the period from timing T1 to timing T2 in the ready-to-win production period of super ready-to-win is set as the first operation valid period in which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is valid, and from timing T3 A period up to timing T4 is set as a second operation valid period during which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is valid.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) to (C), when the first operation valid period starts at timing T1 while the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is being executed, the effect control CPU 120
The progress of the ready-to-reach performance of super reach is interrupted and the operation promotion performance is started. At this time, display of an operation prompting display, an operation explanation display, and a valid period bar display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), at timing T2 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the first operation effective period ends, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display and an operation explanation display. and end the display of the validity period bar display. Then, at the timing T3 when the second operation effective period starts, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the operation prompting display, the action explanation display, and the effective period bar display. And, when it comes to the timing T4 when the second operation effective period ends without the pressing operation of the push button 31B being detected, the effect control CPU
120 terminates the operation promoting effect and restarts the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. At this time, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the effective period bar display ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7B, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation effective period (timing TS), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the operation promotion effect. Start the cut-in production. At this time, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the effective period bar display ends. Then, at timing T5 set in the effect control pattern as the end timing of the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 120 ends the cut-in effect and restarts the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7(C), at timing T2 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the first operation effective period ends, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display and an operation explanation display. and end the display of the validity period bar display. Then, at the timing T3 when the second operation effective period starts, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the operation prompting display, the action explanation display, and the effective period bar display. Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the second operation effective period (timing TS), the effect control CPU 120
The cut-in presentation is started after ending the operation promotion presentation. At this time, the display of the operation prompting display, the operation explanation display, and the effective period bar display ends. Then, at timing T5 set in the effect control pattern as the end timing of the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 12
0 ends the cut-in effect and restarts the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super reach.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation valid period, the cut-in effect is executed during the period from the timing TS to the timing T5. Similarly, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the second operation effective period, the cut-in effect is executed during the period from the timing TS to the timing T5. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect period of the cut-in effect changes according to the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period.

Here, the player who pays attention to the form of the cut-in effect wants to perform the pressing operation of the push button 31B earlier in the operation effective period so that the effect period of the cut-in effect becomes longer. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, if the push button 31B is not pressed during the first operation effective period, the "press x 2" with higher reliability of the big hit.
It is possible to confirm whether or not the operation prompting effect is on, and there is a game characteristic that the push button 31B is not dared to be pressed.

According to such a configuration, the player's psychology of desiring to press the push button 31B as soon as possible and the playability of not performing the pressing operation of the push button 31B are combined. can increase interest in

In addition, in the "press x 1" operation prompting effect, the push button 31B is pressed within the first operation valid period.
is not detected, progress of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win B is interrupted during a period from timing T1 at which the operation-promoting performance starts to timing T2 at which the operation-promoting performance ends. Similarly, in the "press x 2" operation promotion effect, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected within the first operation valid period or the second operation valid period, the operation promotion effect is started at timing T1. , the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is interrupted during a period from timing T4 when the operation promoting effect ends.

On the other hand, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, during the period from the timing T1 when the operation promoting effect starts to the timing T5 when the cut-in effect ends, the ready-to-win effect of the super reach B is performed. progress is interrupted.

According to such a configuration, since timing T1 to timing T5 are all timings set in the effect control pattern, whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation effective period is determined. Regardless, the period for interrupting the progress of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win B can be set in the performance control pattern, and the operation promotion performance and the cut-in performance can be performed without unintentionally affecting other performances. can be preferably carried out.

In the effect control pattern, the timings T1 to T4 are set so that the length of the second valid period of operation is shorter than the length of the first valid period of operation.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation prompting effect from being slowed down during the second operation valid period.

(Example of operation promotion effect and cut-in effect)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the "press x 1" operation promotion effect and cut-in effect.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute the operation promoting effect and the cut-in effect when executing the ready-to-win effect of super reach B. In this production operation example, production control CPU1
20 executes a story presentation in which a series of story developments of the fairy tale "Momotaro" is performed as a reach presentation of super reach B. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the speakers 8L and 8R as the story progresses in the reach effect of super reach B.
Audio output of BGM (Background Music) and narration corresponding to the scene of the story is performed. In this production operation example, as shown in Fig. 11-8(A), the production of a scene in which Momotaro is about to go to Onigashima is executed, and the BGM corresponding to this scene and "I set out to exterminate demons" are executed. is being output.

Further, in this production operation example, a ready-to-win decorative pattern 15SHR corresponding to the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display area when the ready-to-win is established is displayed. Also, in this example of effect operation, a reduced pattern 15SHK is displayed to indicate that the variable display is being performed. The reduced pattern 15SHK is displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the decoration pattern, starts the variable display at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern, and finishes the variable display at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decoration pattern. Also, the reduced pattern 15SHK is displayed at a position that is always visible to the player regardless of whether the movable body 32 makes an operation sound or not. In addition, if the player can recognize the type of the symbol, the reduced symbol 15SH
Part of K may not be visible. Further, in this example of the effect operation, the suspended display 15SHH corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and the active display 1 corresponding to the variable display being executed
5SHA is displayed.

Then, at the timing when the first operation valid period starts, the effect control CPU 120
The progress of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-reach B is interrupted, and the operation prompting performance of "press x 1" is started. In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-8(B), an operation prompting display 15SHE1 with a button image simulating the push button 31B and an operation explanation display with an operation explanation image showing the characters "Press!" 15SHE2 and a valid period bar display 15SHE by an operation valid period display image capable of sequentially displaying the remaining valid period for the entire valid period of the first operation valid period.
3 and are displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 performs voice output corresponding to the content of the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. In this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-8(B), an operation explanation display 15SHE
In response to the character "Push!" of 2, the voice output of "Push!"

Also, in this production operation example, as shown in FIG. The pending indication 15SHH and the active indication 15SHA are displayed dark.

According to such a configuration, since the operation prompting display 15SHE1, the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and the effective period bar display 15SHE3 are conspicuously displayed, it is possible to favorably increase attention to the operation prompting effect.

On the other hand, in this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-8(B), even if the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is interrupted, the brightness of the reduced pattern 15SHK does not change. Further, even when the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is interrupted, the BGM corresponding to the scene at the time of interruption is continuously output.

According to such a configuration, when the progress of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win B is interrupted, it is possible to recognize that the variable display is continuing without causing misunderstanding that the variable display has ended. be able to.

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect. At this time, the effect control CPU120
outputs a sound corresponding to the content of the cut-in effect, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. Note that when the cut-in effect is being executed, the push button 31B is vibrated more strongly than when the operation promoting effect is being executed. In this example of the effect operation, as shown in FIG. 11-8(C), the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect with the "golden background" is displayed, and " It might be hot~" is output, and the push button 31B vibrates more strongly than when the operation prompting effect is being executed.

Also, in this production operation example, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display layer to be displayed, the display layer on which the suspended display 15SHH is displayed, and the display layer arranged on the front side of the display layer on which the active display 15SHA is displayed. Also, the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect is an image having a size that covers the entire display area of the image display device 5 .

According to such a configuration, since the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect is conspicuously displayed, attention to the cut-in effect can be favorably increased.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 may display an eye-catching image during the period until the next variable display is started when the variable display is finished. The eye-catching image is an image having a size that covers the entire display area of the image display device 5, such as the cut-in effect image 15SHC. Therefore, an inexperienced player may not be familiar with the effect image 15S of the cut-in effect.
Although the HC is displayed, there is a possibility that the variable display ends and the eye-catching image is displayed.

Also, in this example of the effect operation, as shown in FIG. 11-8(C), the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect is displayed on the display layer arranged behind the display layer on which the reduced pattern 15SHK is displayed. It is Further, as described above, even when progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is interrupted, the BGM corresponding to the scene at the time of interruption is continuously output.

According to such a configuration, when the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect having a size that covers the entire display area of the image display device 5 is displayed, it is possible to misunderstand that the variable display has ended. It is possible to make the user recognize that the variable display continues.

Then, when the end timing of the cut-in effect comes, the effect control CPU 120 ends the cut-in effect and restarts the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-8(D), a production of a scene on the way to Onigashima is executed, and BGM corresponding to this scene and "Momotaro set out to exterminate demons" are produced. Audio is being output.

In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-8(D), when the progress of the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win B is restarted, the production image of the ready-to-win production and the ready-to-win decorative pattern 15SHR, which have been displayed darkly, are displayed on hold. 15SHH and active display 15SHA are displayed with normal brightness.

FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the "press x 2" operation promotion effect and the cut-in effect.

As in the case of the "press x 1" operation promoting effect, at the timing when the first operation valid period starts, the effect control CPU 120 interrupts the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B,
The "press x 2" operation prompting effect is started. In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(A), an operation promotion display 15SHE1 by a button image imitating the push button 31B,
An operation explanation display 15SHE2 by an operation explanation image with the characters "Press!" A bar display 15SHE3 is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 performs voice output corresponding to the content of the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(A), an operation explanation display 15SHE
In response to the character "Push!" of 2, the voice output of "Push!" Also, when the progress of the reach effect of super reach B is interrupted, the B corresponding to the scene when it was interrupted
GM is continuously output.

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect. At this time, the effect control CPU120
outputs a sound corresponding to the content of the cut-in effect, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. In this production operation example, FIG. 11-9 (D)
, a cut-in effect image 15SHC with a "golden background" is displayed, and a voice output of "It might be hot~" is performed in response to the lines of the character displayed in the cut-in effect. The button 31B vibrates while lighting in a manner different from the normal manner.

In this way, when the operation prompting effect for prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed during the first operation effective period, it is either the “pressing×1” operation prompting effect or the “pressing×2” operation prompting effect. Alternatively, the operation prompting effect is executed in an indistinguishable manner. and the first
When the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, "Press x 1"
In both cases of the operation promoting effect of "Press x 2" and the operation promoting effect of "Press x 2", the cut-in effect of "golden background" can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible for the user to know which of the "pressing x 1" operation prompting effect and the "pressing x 2" operation prompting effect is being executed, and the first operation is performed. When an operation prompting effect for prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed during the effective period, the awareness of the selection is to clarify which operation prompting effect is performed without performing the pressing operation of the push button 31B. can help.

On the other hand, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the first operation effective period ends, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the operation prompting display 15SHE1, the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and the effective period bar display 15SHE3. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the voice output of "press", returns the lighting mode of the push button 31B to the normal mode or turns off the light, and stops the vibration.

In this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(B), even if the display of the operation prompting display 15SHE1, the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and the effective period bar display 15SHE3 ends, the effect image of the interrupted ready-to-win effect is displayed. , the reach decoration symbol 15SHR, the pending display 15SHH, and the active display 15SHA remain darkly displayed. On the other hand, even after the display of the operation prompting display 15SHE1, the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and the effective period bar display 15SHE3 is finished, the variable display of the brightly displayed reduced pattern 15SHK continues, and the BGM corresponding to the interrupted scene is continued. is continuously output.

According to such a configuration, when the operation prompting effect prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed in the first operation effective period, the player who did not dare to press the push button 31B is given the following message:
It is possible to heighten expectations for the fact that the "press x 2" operation prompting effect is being executed.

Then, at the timing when the second operation valid period starts, the effect control CPU 120
Start displaying the operation prompt display, the operation explanation display, and the valid period bar display. In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(C), an operation prompting display 15SHE1 with a button image imitating the push button 31B and an explanation of the operation with the characters "I'll give you another chance!" An operation explanation display 15SHE2 using an image, and a valid period bar display 15SHE3 using an operation valid period display image that can sequentially display the remaining valid period for the entire valid period of the second operation valid period.
and are displayed.

Here, as described above, the length of the second operation valid period is shorter than the length of the first operation valid period. Therefore, when the second operation effective period starts, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effective period in such a manner that the ratio of the first bar display area displayed at the start of the operation effective period is smaller than that when the first operation effective period starts. A bar display 15SHE3 is displayed. And, production control CPU
Reference numeral 120 designates the ratio of the first bar display area to the entire area of the bar display so that the first bar display area decreases at the same rate per unit time during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period. change the proportion.

According to such a configuration, the validity period bar display 15SHE3 displayed when the second operation validity period starts indicates that the length of the second operation validity period is shorter than the length of the first operation validity period. , can be intuitively recognized.

The effect control CPU 120 performs voice output corresponding to the content of the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(C), in response to the characters "I'll give you another chance!" is performed sporadically, and the push button 31B vibrates while lighting in a manner different from the normal manner. Also at this time, the BGM corresponding to the interrupted scene continues to be output.

According to such a configuration, as described above, since the second operation effective period is shorter than the first operation effective period, there is a sense of speed and tension compared to the mode in which the voice output corresponding to the content of the action explanation display 15SHE2 is repeated. It is possible to give a feeling and effectively prompt the operation in a short operation effective period.

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the second operation valid period, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect. At this time, the effect control CPU120
outputs a sound corresponding to the content of the cut-in effect, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. Note that when the cut-in effect is being executed, the push button 31B is vibrated more strongly than when the operation promoting effect is being executed. In this example of the effect operation, as shown in FIG. 11-9(D), the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect with the "golden background" is displayed, and in response to the dialogue of the character displayed in the cut-in effect, " It might be hot~" is output, and the push button 31B vibrates more strongly than when the operation prompting effect is being executed.

In this way, in the case of the "press x 2" operation prompting effect, even if the push button 31B is not pressed during the first operation valid period, the push button 31 is pressed during the second operation valid period.
By performing the pressing operation B, the cut-in effect of "golden background" is executed in the same manner as when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is performed in the first operation effective period.

According to such a configuration, when the operation promoting effect prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed in the first operation effective period,
It is possible to give an opportunity to execute the cut-in effect of "golden background" again, and to enhance the interest accompanying the operation promoting effect.

(Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 15SH)
The invention relating to the characteristic portion 15SH is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the invention.

(Modification 1)
In the above-described embodiment, the operation is valid during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period, and the first An example has been described in which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is validated and the pressing operation of the push button 31B is encouraged during both the operation valid period and the second operation valid period. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period, the operation to the detection means different from each other is validated, and the operation is prompted by the operation promotion presentation. The target detection means may be different.

FIGS. 11-10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the operation promoting effect and the cut-in effect according to Modification 1. FIG. In this example of the effect operation, the effect control CPU 120 validates the pressing operation of the push button 31B during the first operation valid period, and validates the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A during the second operation valid period.

As in the case of the "press x 1" operation promotion effect and the "press x 2" operation promotion effect, at the timing when the first operation valid period starts, the effect control CPU 120 advances the ready-to-win effect of super reach B. is interrupted, and the operation prompting effect according to the first modification is started. In this example of effect operation, as shown in FIG. 11-10(A), an operation prompting display 15SHE1 with a button image simulating the push button 31B and an operation explanation display with an operation explanation image showing the characters "Press!" 15SHE2 and a valid period bar display 15SHE3 by an operation valid period display image capable of sequentially displaying the remaining valid period for the entire valid period of the first operation valid period are displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 performs voice output corresponding to the content of the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. In this production operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(A), the operation explanation display 15SH
Corresponding to the character "Push!" of E2, the voice output of "Push!" is repeatedly performed, and the push button 31B vibrates while lighting in a manner different from the normal manner. Further, even when the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is interrupted, the BGM corresponding to the scene at the time of interruption is continuously output.

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect. At this time, the effect control CPU120
outputs a sound corresponding to the content of the cut-in effect, and lights and vibrates the push button 31B in a mode different from the normal mode. Note that when the cut-in effect is being executed, the push button 31B is vibrated more strongly than when the operation promoting effect is being executed. For example, in the same way as in the case of the "press x 2" operation promoting effect, the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect with the "golden background" is displayed, and in response to the line of the character displayed in the cut-in effect, "hot "Maybe~" is output, and the push button 31B vibrates more strongly than when the operation prompting effect is being executed.

In this way, when the operation prompting effect for prompting the user to press the push button 31B is executed during the first operation valid period, similar to the "pressing x 1" operation promoting effect and the "pressing x 2" operation promoting effect, It is sufficient that the operation prompting effect is executed in a manner indistinguishable from the operation prompting effect according to the first modification. Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected within the first operation valid period, the operation according to the modification 1 is performed in the same manner as the operation promoting effect of "pressing x 1" and the operation promoting effect of "pressing x 2". Also in the case of the promotion effect, the cut-in effect of "golden background" may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it impossible for the user to know that the operation prompting effect according to the modification 1 is present, and the operation prompting effect prompting the user to press the push button 31B is executed during the first operation valid period. When the push button 31B is pressed, the modification 1
It is possible to promote awareness of the selection of clarifying whether the operation promotion effect is related to.

On the other hand, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the first operation effective period ends, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the operation prompting display 15SHE1, the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and the effective period bar display 15SHE3. . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 stops the voice output of "press", returns the lighting mode of the push button 31B to the normal mode or turns off the light, and stops the vibration.

In this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B), even if the display of the operation prompting display 15SHE1, the operation explanation display 15SHE2, and the effective period bar display 15SHE3 is finished, the effect image of the interrupted ready-to-win effect is displayed. , the reach decoration symbol 15SHR, the pending display 15SHH, and the active display 15SHA remain darkly displayed. On the other hand, the operation promotion display 15SHE1
Even after the operation explanation display 15SHE2 and the effective period bar display 15SHE3 are finished, the variable display of the brightly displayed reduced pattern 15SHK continues, and the BGM corresponding to the interrupted scene continues to be output. ing.

According to such a configuration, when the operation prompting effect prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed in the first operation effective period, the operation prompting according to the modification 1 is performed for the player who did not dare to press the push button 31B. It is possible to heighten expectations for the performance being executed.

Then, at the timing when the second operation valid period starts, the effect control CPU 120
Start displaying the operation prompt display, the operation explanation display, and the valid period bar display. In this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(C), an operation prompting display 15SHE1 by a controller image imitating the stick controller 31A, characters "I'll give you another chance!" and an operation explanation display 15SHE2 by an operation explanation image written with characters and a second
A valid period bar display 15SHE3 by an operation valid period display image that can sequentially display the remaining valid period for the entire valid period of the operation is displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the contents of the action explanation display 15SHE2, and lights and vibrates the stick controller 31A in a mode different from the normal mode. In this effect operation example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in response to the characters "I'll give you another chance!" The voice output of "Pull it" is performed singly, and the stick controller 31A vibrates while lighting in a manner different from the normal manner. Also at this time, the BGM corresponding to the interrupted scene continues to be output.

As described above, in the operation prompting effect of the first modification, the operation explanation display 15SHE2 saying "I'll give you one more chance!" while the operation prompting display 15SHE1 and the operation explanation display 1 of "Exit!"
5SHE2 and the voice output of "Pull this time" suitably notify that the detection means for which the operation is valid is different from the first operation valid period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to add unexpectedness to the development of the operation prompting effect, but also to effectively prompt the operation during the short operation effective period.

Then, when the tilting operation of the push button 31B is detected within the second operation valid period, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in effect. At this time, the effect control CPU120
outputs a sound corresponding to the content of the cut-in effect, and lights and vibrates the stick controller 31A in a mode different from the normal mode. Note that when the cut-in effect is being executed, the stick controller 31A is vibrated more strongly than when the operation promoting effect is being executed. In this example of the effect operation, as shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the effect image 15SHC of the cut-in effect with the "golden background" is displayed, and in response to the line of the character displayed in the cut-in effect, " It might be hot~" is output, and the stick controller 31A vibrates more strongly than when the operation prompting effect is being executed.

As described above, in the case of the operation prompting effect of Modification 1, even if the push button 31B is not pressed during the first operation valid period, the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A is performed during the second operation valid period. In the same way as when the push button 31B is pressed during the operation effective period, the cut-in effect of "golden background" is executed.

According to such a configuration, when the operation promoting effect prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is executed in the first operation effective period,
It is possible to give an opportunity to execute the cut-in effect of "golden background" again, and to enhance the interest accompanying the operation promoting effect.

(Modification 2)
In the above embodiment, when the second operation valid period starts, the effective period bar display is such that the ratio of the first bar display area displayed at the start of the operation valid period is smaller than that when the first operation valid period starts. 15SHE3 is displayed, and the first bar display is displayed on the entire area of the bar display so that the rate of decrease of the first bar display area per unit time is the same between the valid period of the first operation and the valid period of the second operation. An example of changing the ratio of regions has been described. Instead of such a configuration, when the second operation valid period starts and when the first operation valid period starts, the ratio of the first bar display area displayed at the start of the operation valid period is the same. Period bar display 1
5SHE3 is displayed, and the first bar display area with respect to the entire area of the bar display is increased so that the rate of decrease of the first bar display area per unit time is higher during the second operation valid period than during the first operation valid period. You may make it change the ratio of. According to such a configuration, the material of the image displayed as the effective period bar display 15SHE3 can be diverted, and the development cost related to the operation promotion presentation can be suppressed.

(Modification 3)
In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the effective period bar display 15SHE3 is displayed even during the second operation effective period. Instead of such a configuration, the effective period bar display 15SHE3 may be displayed during the first operation effective period, while the effective period bar display 15SHE3 may not be displayed during the second operation effective period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw more attention to the operation prompting display 15SHE1 and the operation explanation display 15SHE2 in the second operation valid period, and to more intuitively recognize that the operation can be performed again. can be made

(Modification 4)
In the above embodiment, the automatic operation function may be turned on/off by the player's will. Here, the automatic operation is a function of executing a process corresponding to the operation performed even if the player does not actually perform the operation during the operation valid period. When the function of automatic operation is set to ON, the effect control CPU 12
0 executes a cut-in effect, considering that the operation has been performed during the first operation valid period, when the operation prompting effect of "press x 2" is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a game feature that only the player who turns off the automatic operation function and performs the operation by himself does not dare to perform the operation even if the operation promotion effect is executed. It is possible to increase the significance of turning off the automatic operation function.

(Modification 5)
In the above-described embodiment, the production control CPU 120, for example, at the start of the variable display or at a predetermined timing during execution, produces a mode in which a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game By executing a predetermined aspect including some or all of the aspects in which the flash lamps included in the effect lamp 9 etc. shine, the display result is "
A one-shot notification mode effect may be executed to immediately notify that a "jackpot" will be achieved. When executing the effect of the one-shot notification mode at the timing before the timing that can be the first operation effective period in the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation prompting effect and the cut-in effect. According to such a configuration, despite the execution of the one-shot notification mode effect, the execution of the operation prompting effect and the cut-in effect other than the one-shot notification mode does not give a sense of distrust. can be prevented.

(Modification 6)
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured such that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, step S11 of the special symbol process shown in FIG.
In the special symbol normal process executed at 0, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the winning probability of the "jackpot" may be changed. The setting value is
It consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning, and 6, 5, and 4.
”, “3”, “2”, and “1”, the winning probability decreases as the value decreases. That is, when "6" is set as the setting value, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest, and "5", "
4”, “3”, “2”, and “1”, the lower the value, the lower the advantage.
In this way, when the winning probability of the big win changes according to the setting value, when the setting value is the first setting value and when the setting value is the second setting value different from the first setting value, "Press x 2 ” may differ from each other. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a set value by executing the "press x 2" operation prompting effect.

(Modification 7)
In the above-described embodiment, an operation prompting effect capable of validating the operation during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period and prompting the player to perform an operation during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period. , it may be possible to execute a plurality of types of effects that are different from each other. In that case, a specific type of operation prompting effect among the plurality of types of operation prompting effects may be a one-shot notification mode effect that immediately notifies that the display result will be a "big hit". According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in not performing an operation even if the operation prompting effect is executed during the first operation valid period.

(Modification 8)
In the configuration in which the odds of winning the jackpot change according to the set value as in Modification 6, as in Modification 7, a specific type of operation prompting effect can be executed as a one-shot notification mode effect, For example, only when the set value is set to "6", the display result of the variable display is "missing"
When , a specific type of operation prompting effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, the player who expected the display result to be a "jackpot" by the execution of the specific type of operation promotion effect will be disappointed. Since the fact that the value is set to "6" is definitely notified, it is possible to increase the motivation to continue playing the game.

(Modification 9)
In the above-described embodiment, an operation right that validates an operation on the detection means may be granted, and a stock effect in which the granted operation right is stocked may be executed. When the stock effect is executed, an operation valid period for validating the operation to the detecting means is given for the number of the stocked operation rights, and one stocked operation right is given when the operation valid period is given. Consume. In the pachinko game machine 1 capable of executing such a stock effect, the operation is valid during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period, and the player is allowed to perform the operation during the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period. To consume only one operation right even if an operation is not executed in the first operation valid period and a second operation valid period is granted when an operation prompting performance capable of prompting is executed. According to such a configuration, it becomes reluctant not to perform an operation even if the operation prompting effect is executed during the first operation effective period, out of fear that the stocked operation right will be consumed. You can prevent it from being lost.

(Modification 10)
In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the effect period of the cut-in effect changes according to the timing at which the operation is detected during the operation valid period. In such a configuration, if a moving image or animation is used as the cut-in effect, the effect period may end without the moving image or animation being played to the end. Instead of such a configuration, the effect period of the effect other than the operation promotion effect and the cut-in effect is changed according to the timing at which the operation is detected during the operation valid period, and regardless of the timing at which the operation is detected during the operation valid period. The production period of the cut-in production may be kept unchanged. According to such a configuration,
A cut-in effect of moving images and animations can be suitably executed.

(Modification 11)
In the above-described embodiment, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", after deriving the fixed decorative pattern that will be the big hit combination, during the period until the special figure fluctuation time elapses,
It is also possible to make it possible to execute a blessing that congratulates that the display result of the variable display is a "big hit".
In the pachinko game machine 1 capable of executing such a blessing effect, if the effect period of the cut-in effect does not change regardless of the timing at which the operation is detected in the operation valid period, as in the tenth modification, the operation The effect period of the blessing effect may be changed according to the timing at which the operation is detected during the valid period. According to such a configuration, the display result of the variable display does not affect the production period of the important production such as the ready-to-win production or the advance notice production that suggests that the display result will be a "big hit", so as not to reduce the interest. can be

(Modification 12)
In the above-described embodiment, an example of executing the operation prompting effect when the ready-to-win effect of super reach B is being executed has been described. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, an operation prompting effect may be executed when the variable display mode of decorative symbols becomes a predetermined ready-to-win mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the display result will be a "big hit" at the timing when the variable display mode of the decoration pattern becomes the predetermined ready-to-win mode.

(Modification 13)
In the above-described embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, another effect mode may be changed according to the cut-in effect mode. For example, when the “green background” cut-in effect is executed, the “green” effect is applied to the resumed reach effect,
When the cut-in effect of "red background" is executed, the effect of "red" is applied to the restarted reach effect, and when the cut-in effect of "gold background" is executed, the restarted reach effect is changed to "gold". apply an effect. According to such a configuration, by executing the cut-in effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of other effects, so that when the operation prompting effect is executed in the first operation effective period, the operation can be performed. It is possible to deepen the significance of selecting whether to surely execute the cut-in performance or to confirm whether the second operation effective period is reached without performing the operation, and to improve the interest.

(Modification 14)
In the above embodiment, the cut-in effect may be executed without executing the operation promotion effect. In this case, the reliability of big wins may be different between when the cut-in performance is executed after the operation promotion performance is executed and when the cut-in performance is executed without the operation promotion performance. For example, when an operation prompting performance is executed and a cut-in performance is executed, the reliability of the big hit is made higher than when the cut-in performance is executed without the operation prompting performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest when the operation prompting effect is executed. In addition, if the operation promotion performance is executed, the mode of the cut-in performance is expected to have a high degree of reliability of the big hit, so the willingness to perform the operation when the operation promotion performance is executed in the first operation valid period. can be enhanced, and the amusement can be enhanced by the game property of whether or not to perform an operation in the first operation valid period.

(Modification 15)
In the above-described embodiment, as the operation prompting effect that prompts the same operation for the same detection means,
It may be possible to execute a plurality of types of operation prompting effects with different modes. In that case, the reliability of the big win may be different between when the operation promoting effect of the first mode is executed and when the operation promoting effect of the second mode is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a first mode of operation prompting effect that prompts the user to press the push button 31B without displaying the operation explanation display, and
A mode of displaying an operation explanation display with the characters "chance" and a mode of displaying an operation explanation display with the characters "hard push" in a mode of displaying an operation explanation display with characters "chance" to prompt the pressing operation of the push button 31B , the operation prompting effect of the third mode prompting the pressing operation of the push button 31B can be executed. Then, when the operation promoting performance of the second mode is executed, the reliability of big win is made higher than when the operation promoting performance of the first mode is executed. Further, when the operation promoting performance of the third mode is executed, the reliability of the big win is made higher than when the operation promoting performance of the second mode is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of the operation prompting effect for prompting the same operation to the same detection means, and to prevent the user from becoming bored with the operation prompting effect.

(Modification 16)
In the above embodiment, the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is interrupted to execute the operation promoting effect, the cut-in effect is executed when the player's operation is detected, and the ready-to-win effect is executed when the cut-in effect ends. An example of resuming the progress of the production has been described. Instead of such a configuration,
Alternatively, in addition to such a configuration, the progress of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is interrupted to execute an operation promotion effect, and when the player's operation is detected, the state of the ready-to-win effect is changed to continue the progress of the ready-to-win effect. It may be restarted. For example, in a battle production in which a friendly character battles an enemy character as a reach production of super reach, the progress of the battle production is interrupted and an operation promotion production is executed, and when the player's operation is detected, the allied character appears. to resume the progress of the battle production. According to such a configuration, since the mode of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win changes depending on whether or not an operation is performed when the operation-promoting effect is executed, the operation-promoting effect is executed during the first operation valid period. It is possible to heighten the willingness to perform the operation when the first operation valid period is reached, and to increase the amusement of whether or not to perform the operation during the first operation valid period.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 15SH)
In relation to the feature part 15SH, the detection of the player's motion suggests an effective period of validity,
There is known a gaming machine that executes a promotion effect that prompts a player to perform a motion, and that executes a specific effect when the player's motion is detected within an effective period (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-212858). .

The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-212858 starts a first mode promotion effect suggesting a validity period, and after ending the first mode promotion effect, a second mode promotion effect suggesting a validity period. start the performance. However, detection of the player's action is invalid during the period in which the promotion effect of the first mode is being executed. Therefore, there is no meaning in performing the action during the period in which the promotion effect of the first mode is being executed, and the interest associated with the promotion effect is insufficient.

Therefore, in order to increase the interest accompanying the promotion effect, the game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 15SH is
A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pachinko game machine 1
is controllable to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a stick controller capable of detecting the tilting operation of the player 31A, a push button 31B capable of detecting a player's pressing operation,
etc.), the detection of the player's action suggests an effective period of validity, and the promotion effect execution means capable of executing the promotion effect that prompts the player to act (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the player (e.g., it is possible to execute an operation prompting effect that displays an effective period bar display that informs the operation effective period during which the detection of the operation is effective, an operation prompting display that prompts the player to operate, etc.), and the game is played within the effective period Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when a player's action is detected (For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a cut-in effect when a player's operation is detected within the operation valid period and the like), and the promotion effect execution means starts the effect suggesting the first effective period, and ends the effect when the action of the player is not detected within the first effective period. A promotion effect of the first pattern (for example, displaying a valid period bar indicating the valid period of the first operation, and erasing the valid period bar display when the player's operation is not detected within the valid period of the first operation) (e.g., it is possible to execute an operation prompting effect of "press x 1"), the effect suggesting the first valid period is started, and when the player's action is not detected within the first valid period, the first 2) a promotion effect of a second pattern in which an effect suggesting a valid period is started and the effect is terminated when the action of the player is not detected within the second valid period (for example, the first operation valid period is notified); A valid period bar display is displayed, a valid period bar display is displayed to notify a second operation valid period when a player's operation is not detected within the first operation valid period, and a player is displayed within the second operation valid period. "Press × 2" to clear the valid period bar display when no operation is detected
and the like), and when the promotion effect of the second pattern is executed than when the promotion effect of the first pattern is executed, The degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is high (for example, when the operation promotion effect of "pressing x 2" is executed than when the operation promoting effect of "pressing down x 1" is executed) high reliability, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new game feature in which the player dares not perform any action even if the promotion effect is executed, thereby enhancing the amusement associated with the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 15SH is the gaming machine of the means 1, wherein the specific effect executing means is provided when the action of the player is detected within the first valid period in the promotion effect of the first pattern. and when the action of the player is detected within the first valid period in the promotion effect of the second pattern (for example, the operation promotion effect of "pressing x 1") can be executed. When the player's operation is detected within the first operation valid period in and "press x 2"
(e.g., when the player's operation is detected within the first operation valid period in the operation promotion effect, the cut-in effect of "golden background" can be executed).

According to such a configuration, when the promotion performance is executed in the first effective period, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, and the interest associated with the promotion performance can be prevented. can increase

The gaming machine of means 3 relating to the characteristic part 15SH is the gaming machine of means 1 or 2, wherein the specific effect executing means detects the action of the player within the first valid period in the promotion effect of the second pattern. and when the action of the player is detected within the second effective period of the promotion effect of the second pattern (for example, "Press ×
2" when the player's operation is detected within the first operation valid period in the operation promotion effect of "
When the player's operation is detected within the second operation valid period in the operation promoting effect of "press x 2", the cut-in effect of "golden background" can be executed, etc.). .

According to such a configuration, the player who did not dare to perform the action even if the promotion performance was executed in the first effective period will have the opportunity to execute the specific performance again. It can enhance the interest that accompanies it.

According to the gaming machine of means 4 relating to the characteristic part 15SH, in the gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 3, the first valid period and the second valid period have different lengths (for example, second operation The length of the validity period may be shorter than the length of the first operation validity period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 15SH is the gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4, in which a plurality of types of the detection means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, includes a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, etc.), and the promotion effect execution means suggests the type of detection means capable of detecting the action of the player in the valid period (
For example, displaying a controller image simulating the stick controller 31A or a button image simulating the push button 31B as an operation prompting display, etc.), detecting means suggested in the first valid period, and the second valid period may be of the same type (for example, displaying a button image as an operation prompting display in the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the opportunity to operate the same type of detection means will come again, so that the attention to the detection means can be increased.

The gaming machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic part 15SH is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, in which a plurality of types of the detection means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has, as described above, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, etc.), and the promotion effect execution means suggests the type of detection means capable of detecting the action of the player in the valid period (
For example, displaying a controller image simulating the stick controller 31A or a button image simulating the push button 31B as an operation prompting display, etc.), detecting means suggested in the first valid period, and the second valid period is of a different type than the detection means suggested in (for example, displaying a button image as an operation prompting display during the first operation effective period, and displaying a controller image as an operation prompting display during the second operation effective period, etc.) , may be

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add unexpectedness when the opportunity to perform the action comes again, and to increase the interest accompanying the promotion effect.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 100... Game control microcomputer 120... Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of types of detection means capable of detecting player actions;
promotion effect execution means capable of suggesting an effective period in which the detection of the player's motion is effective and executing a promotion effect to prompt the player to perform the motion;
a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the action of the player is detected within the valid period;
The promotion effect execution means is
a first pattern of executing a promoting effect suggesting a first valid period and ending the promoting effect suggesting the first valid period executed when the action of the player is not detected within the first valid period; ,
Execution of promotion effect suggesting the first valid period, execution of effect suggesting the second valid period when the action of the player is not detected within the first valid period, and execution of the effect suggesting the second valid period within the second valid period. and a second pattern that ends the effect suggesting the second valid period executed when the player's action is not detected, and
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the promotion effect of the second pattern is executed than when the promotion effect of the first pattern is executed,
As the promotion effect suggesting the second effective period in the second pattern, a promotion effect different from the promotion effect suggesting the first effective period in the second pattern can be executed,
The promotion effect in the first pattern suggesting the first effective period and the promotion effect suggesting the first effective period in the second pattern can be executed in the same mode ,
further comprising promotion effect determination means for determining in which of a plurality of patterns including the first pattern and the second pattern the promotion effect can be executed,
When the promotion effect determining means determines that the promotion effect of the first pattern can be executed and when it is determined that the promotion effect of the second pattern can be executed, the first It is possible to execute a specific effect in the same manner when a player's action is detected within the valid period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images